Question Bank

SYSTEMS OF TRAIN WORKING
QUESTION BANK (SIGNAL)

(Subjective Questions)
Q1: With the help of a sketch, define station limits for "B" class stations equipped with Two Aspect signalling on single line
and double line sections.
2.41 STATION SECTION means that section of station limits
(a) At a class `B' station provided with two-aspect signals, which is included -
(i) On a double line, between Home Signal and the Last Stop Signal of the Station in either
direction;
OR
(ii) On a single line –
Between the Shunting Limit Boards or Advanced Starters (if any), or
Between the Home Signals if there are no Shunting Limit Boards or Advanced Starters,
or
Between the outermost facing points, if there are no Home Signals or Shunting Limit
Boards or Advanced Starters;
(b) At a class `B' station provided with manually operated multiple-aspect or modified lower
quadrant signals, which is included --
(i) On a double line --
Between the outermost facing points and the last Stop Signal of the station in either
direction, or
Between the Block Section Limit Board, where provided, and the last Stop Signal of the
station in either direction, OR
(ii) On a single line -
Between the Shunting Limit Boards or Advanced Starters (if any), or
Between the outermost facing points if there are no Shunting Limit Board or Advanced
Starters.
Q2: What are the classifications of stations in Indian Railways?

14.1 For the purpose of rules, stations in absolute block system are classified as shown
below.
(a) CLASS À' STATIONS: Where line clear may not be given for a train, unless the line
on which it is intended to receive the train is clear for atleast 400 metres beyond the
Home Signal, or upto the starter.
(b) CLASS `B' STATIONS: Where line clear may be given for a train before the line has
been clear for the reception of the train within the station section.
(c) CLASS `C' STATIONS OR BLOCK HUTS: Where permission to approach may not
be given for a train unless the whole of the last proceeding train has passed
complete at least 400 metres beyond the Home Signal and is continuing its journey.
This will also include an Intermediate Block Post.
14.2 As the classification is laid upon the minimum signalling equipment provided, in each
direction for class of stations are shown below. Stations in automatic block territories are not
classified, as from the point of view of the operation of trains, the stations as such have no
significance.
Class of Station Minimum Equipment Additional Equipment

A. Two Aspect Signalling:
1. A Warner, Home, Starters Or under approved special instructions an
outer, Warner behind outer and starter
2. B-Single Line Outer, Home Warner if trains run through at speeds
exceeding 50kmph without stopping. Advanced
starter or SLB where shunting in the face of an
approaching train is required.
3. B-Double Line Outer, Home & Starters Warner if trains run through at speeds
exceeding 50 kmph without stopping.
4. C Warner, Home
5. D (These are non- block stations)
B. Multiple Aspect Signalling:
6. B Distant, Home, Starters Advanced Starter or SLB on single line where
shunting in the face of an approaching train is
required. Starters on double line.
Block section limit board where there are no
points or outermost point at the approach end
is in trailing direction on double line.
7. C Distant, Home
C. Modified Lower Quadrant:
8. B Distant, Home, Warner MLQ Signalling may be used only where it is
below main Home & expressly sanctioned by a special order of the
Starters Rail Board
9. C Distant & Home
Q3: What do you mean by "Read Back Technique" in Railway signalling? Please cite few examples of this technique being
used in your Railway.
Q4: What is the difference between "A" Marker and "A" Board in Railway signalling?
(i) Automatic stop signals of colour light type are provided with letter 'A' in black on
white circular disc to distinguish the signal as a full automatic signal.
(i) Semi-automatic stop signals of colour light type are provided with white illuminated
letter 'A' against black background to distinguish the signal. when working as an
automatic signal.
Letter 'A' extinguishes when the signal is working as a manual signal.

APPEARANC PROVIDED
DISCRIPTION
E ON
Automatic Stop Signal. Letter ‘A’ in black on White circular
A
Disc.
Semi - Automatic Stop White illuminated letter ‘A’ against

Signal. black background when working as an
automatic stop signal and letter ‘A’
extinguished when working as a manual
stop signal.
Q6: What do you mean by the "S" Marker and where it is being used in Railway
signalling?
(c) 'S' MARKER: An intermediate siding taking off in the facing direction in passenger running line outside
station limits is provided with a 'S' marker to indicate to the driver that a siding is taking off from the
main line. It is a circular board with letter 'S' painted in black on a yellow background. The board is fixed
on a post, which is painted with black and white bands alternatively as shown in Fig. 7.16 (c).
Q5: What is the normal aspect of a signal in Automatic signaling territory?
Q6: What do you mean by Slip siding and Catch siding? Write down cases when Slip
siding and Catch siding are required to be provided in the Railway system.
The term Ìsolation' denotes the condition in which a line for a particular
movement is separated from all adjoining lines connected to it in such a manner
that the isolated line cannot be fouled or interfered with by any movement taking
place on the adjoining lines. Rules for isolation are laid down in Chapter VIII, Part
III of “Rules for the opening of a Railway or Section of a Railway for the Public
carriage of passengers”. Isolation is compulsory in the following cases.
Catch sidings, and slip sidings, and sidings provided for isolation purpose only.
(d) Slip Sidings and Catch Sidings: The gradient within the station yard has to be low
in order to, that, the vehicles standing at the station do not start moving automatically
due to the effect of gravity. On Indian Railways for all gauges the maximum gradient
permitted is 1:400, whereas 1:1200 is usually allowed within the station yard. No
station yard should be constructed on a gradient steeper than 1:260 except due to
geographic condition where such a gradient cannot be avoided within the station
yard, previous sanction of Railway Board through CRS has to be obtained and
special arrangements like "Slip siding" has to be provided, where the gradient
steeper than 1:100 falling away from the station in its close neighbourhood. This is to
prevent vehicles escaping from the station and trying to enter into the next block
section. Similar arrangements have also to be provided if the gradient steeper than
1:80 falling towards the station. This arrangement is known as `catch siding'. It is to
trap vehicles coming uncontrolled from the block section and trying to enter into the
station."Slip siding" and `catch siding' points must be interlocked with the block
instruments, and such sidings should not be used for shunting or stabling purposes
(see fig. h).
METHODS OF ISOLATION
Q7: In Indian Railways, what are the systems of train working adopted? Please also
mention the name of the most widely used system on Indian Railways.
In Indian Railways, six systems of train working are adopted and they are
(a) The Absolute Block System
(b) The Automatic Block System
(c) The Following Trains System
(d) The Pilot Guard System
(e) The Train Staff and Ticket System
(f) The One Train Only System
Out of the above six systems of train working, the Absolute Block System and the
Automatic Block System only shall be used, unless the adoption of other systems are especially
permitted by the Railway Board.
Q8: Please prepare the locking table for Lever numbers 1, 3, 4, 6 & 7 of the following
diagram: -
Q9: What are the essential requirements of the Absolute Block System?
(a) Para 8.01 of General Rules stipulates the essential requirements of the system as under
“Where trains are worked on the Absolute Block System”.
(i) no train shall be allowed to leave a block station unless Line clear has been
received from the block station in advance, and
(ii) On double lines, such line clear shall not be given unless the line is clear not
only upto the first stop signal at the block station at which such line clear is
given but also for an adequate distance beyond it.
(iii) On single lines, such Line Clear shall not be given unless the line is clear of
trains running in the same direction not only upto the first stop signal at the
block station at which such Line Clear is given but also for an adequate distance
beyond it, and is clear of trains running in the direction towards the block station
to which such Line Clear is given.
(b) The General Rule further states that the adequate distance referred above shall not
be less than 400 metres in case of 2 Aspect signalling and 180 metres in Multiple
Aspect Upper Quadrant Semaphore Signalling or Colour Light Signalling and
modified lower quadrant signalling. This is generally called the "Block Overlap" in
signalling parlance. This distance can be reduced in case of necessity but this can
be done, only under "approved special instructions" which means that sanction of
Commissioner of Railway Safety is required to be obtained for reduction in the
adequate distance.
(c) The sketch below will help us to study the essentials of Absolute Block Signalling as
mentioned above. For `B' to give Line Clear to À' line must be clear of trains
between `X` and `Y'.
STN. 'A' STN.'B'

LSS FSS
ADEQUATE
BLOCK SECTION
DISTANCE
X Z Y
(d) À' and `B' are two block stations. Under the Absolute Block System controlling the
movements of train between À' and `B' is such that, Station À' can allow a train to
leave his station towards Station `B' only when the line clear is obtained from Station
`B'. Station `B' is supposed to give the "line clear" for a train to approach towards
`B' only, when the whole block section is clear of trains.
(e) It can be seen from the above that a train despatched from Station À' by obtaining
line clear from Station `B' can travel only upto 1st stop signal of B unless the Signal
is taken ÒFF'. The Station Master at B shall ensure that once the line clear is
granted portion ZY i.e. adequate distance beyond the first stop signal (also generally
referred to as Block Overlap) is in no way obstructed. This in turn ensures that even
if the approaching train overshoots the first stop signal at ÒN' due to any reason, the
driver can still have this extra distance available for him to control the train.
(f) After allowing a train into the block section, the next train can be permitted to enter
the block section only when the previous train has cleared the block section and the
adequate distance ZY, therefore, if the rules governing the system are followed
strictly the possibility of collision between trains is completely eliminated. To make
sure that the Station Masters on both sides are able to follow the rules, provision of
communication between stations under this system is compulsory. An additional aids
to Station Master, Block Instruments, Last Vehicle Check Device etc., also may be
provided according to the requirements.
(g) The conditions for granting line clear are given in Chapter 8 of General Rules as
detailed below:
(i) Rule No.8.02: Conditions for granting Line Clear at Class À' Station
(ii) Rule No.8.03: Conditions for granting Line Clear at Class `B' Station
(iii) Rule No.8.04: Conditions for granting Line Clear at Class `C' Station
(h) In all the above cases, two most important points beside other things are stressed. They are
(i) The whole of the last preceding train has arrived complete; an
(ii) All necessary signals have been put back to ÒN' behind the said train
CLASSIFICATION
(i) The arrival of a complete train is checked either by physical verification (L.V. Board
or Tail Lamp) or by provision of a last vehicle check device or by having continuous
track circuits in the entire block section or by having Axle Counters in the Block
section or by any other approved means.
(j) With regard to ensuring all necessary signals have been put back to ÒN' after the
arrival of a train, these are proved by certain relays which ensure that the signals
have been restored to ÒN' position before closing of the Block Instrument after the
arrival of the train.
Q10: What are the standards of interlocking prescribed in Railway Signalling?

INDIAN RAILWAY SIGNAL ENGINEERING MANUAL, PART - I (1988 EDITION)
Addendum and Corrigendum Slip No. 6 (RB's Letter No. 2003/SIG/SEM/3 Dt. 19.05.2004)
Chapter VII, Para 7.131, Section M Important Minimum Signalling features
Sl. As per New Revised Para 7.131

ITEM
No Std I Std II Std III Std IV
1 Allowable Up to 50 Up to 110 Upto 140 Upto 160
Speed (Kmph)
2 Isolation Y* Y Y Y
3 2A Semaphore/ 2A/MA 2A/MA MA MA

MAS
4 Double Distant N Y** Y Y
5 Point Operation Mech Mech/Elec Mech/Elec Elec
6 Point Locking Key/FPL/ FPL/Pt M/c FPL/Pt M/c Clamp type

HPL direct %
Sl. ITEM Std I Std II Std III Std IV
No
7 Point Detection Mech/Elec Mech/Elec Mech/Elec Elec
8 Lock Detection N Y Y Y
9 Interlocking Key/Mech Mech/Elec/Electronic Mech/Elec/Electronic Elec/Electronic
10 Track Circuiting N Mech: Run thro lines All Running Lines All Running
Elec/Electronic: All Lines
RLs
11 Block Working Token Token / SGE # SGE / TC # SGE / TC
12 Preventing N N N Y%
SPAD
CLASSIFICATION
Q11: What are the different classes of LC gates? Please explain.

CLASSIFICATION
The classification of level crossings, as under, is settled by the Engineering Department
in consultation with the local Government authorities after conducting the level crossing census.
Special class
A Class
For road vehicles
B Class
C Class
D Class For cattle crossings
Detail Special A B C
1. Normal Open to Open to Closed to road traffic. Can be kept Same as for
position of Road Road traffic open to road traffic provided either B
Gate traffic gates are interlocked with signals and
provided telephone communication
with adjacent station/cabin or when
the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) LC should not be located in
suburban section
(b) LC should not be in automatic
block Signalling territory.
(c) Should be provided with lifting
barriers
(d) Should have a telephone
connection with the nearest station
with exchange of private numbers
(e) Visibility at the level crossing
should be good
(f) Should be provided with Whistle
boards on either side at adequate
distance to enjoin the drivers of
approaching trains to give audible
warning of the approach of the
train to the road users.
(g) As long as the L.C gate is kept
open to road traffic, a red flag by
day and red light during night
should be displayed towards
approaching trains on either side of
level crossings
2. Interlocking Should be Same as Should be interlocked with signals:- Should be
of gates interlocked for special (a) In suburban sections interlocked
with signals with with signals:-
(b) In non-suburban sections where
if gates are station
operated from cabins 1. within
within signals
(c) In automatic signalling territories station limits
station limits
where
operated
form cabin
2. in
automatic
CLASSIFICATION
Detail Special A B C
signalling
territories
3.Interlocking Should be Same as To be interlocked To be
of gates with interlocked for special interlocked in
(a) In suburban sections
signals if with gate automatic
gates are signals (b) In automatic signalling territories signalling
outside territories
station limits
4.Telephone Telecomm Same as Same as special Telecommun
comunica- unications special ications with
tion from with ASM’s ASM’s office
the gate office to be to be
lodge if provided provided in
gate within case of
station manned level
limits crossings
5.Telephone Telecomm Same as Telecommunication with adjoining Same as B
Comunica- unication special station to be provided on :- class
tion from with ASM’s
(a) All level crossings on Rajdhani
the gate office of
route;
lodge if adjoining
gate station to (b) On suburban sections; and
outside be (c) On curve obstructing the view of
station provided the level crossing from
limits approaching train and vice versa
6.Warning Should be Should be Same as for A class Same as for
bell provided provided A class
operated where LC where LC is
by is outside outside
approaching station station
train limits limits in all
suburban
sections
and on non-
suburban
sections
provided
with
automatic
signalling
territories
LOOSE LOCKING BETWEEN POINTS IS FOR SAFETY AND FLEXIBILITY
Note:
(a) The level crossing inside station limits should be beyond the advanced starters or
beyond the limits up to which shunting is normally carried or at an adequate distance
of at least 250m ahead of the starters and trailing points of the station where
advanced starters/shunting limit boards are not provided
(b) In case of level crossings falling on suburban section they may be considered for
upgradation to B class in the event of their not qualifying for upgradation to special or
A class and when so upgraded to B class the facilities as indicated for B class
should be provided
(c) In the case of level crossings located outside station limits, protected by signals
where the sighting of the signal by the engine driver is inadequate a warning board
should be placed at not less than emergency breaking distance in rear of the gate
stop signal.
(d) Where level crossing is situated outside station limits in close proximity thereof, the
clear distance between the LC and an outer signal should not be less than a full train
length
(e) In cases where communication with ASM is stipulated, the connection may be given
to the switchman in the cabin as per the local condition.
(f) Provision of warning bells operated by approaching trains should be confined to
interlocked level crossings only.
It will be noted that in accordance with the rules, the interlocking of gates with signals is
compulsory only in the case of the most important category, viz., special class and in the case
of A class only if located within station limits. However, in accordance with the instructions
issued by Railway Board, all special and A class gates are interlocked and B class if the gates
are operated from the cabin.
In all busy level crossings, the gates on each side should be coupled so that they may
be closed quickly. Wicket gates are provided at all special, A and B class crossings so that slow
moving pedestrian traffic (which may be depended upon to exercise due caution, is not
unnecessarily detained. For similar reasons, V shaped traps, which enable cycles being
carried across the gates closed, are also provided where necessary.
All level crossings, irrespective of their classification, must be interlocked if they fall in
sections provided with automatic signalling. `B' class gates falling in Suburban Sections shall
also be interlocked. Further interlocking shall be provided for all `B' and `C' class gates if they
are operated from the Cabin.
Q12: What do you mean by the term "Route Holding" in Railway signalling? Please
explain the various means to achieve the same.
ROUTE HOLDING (Para 7.83 of SEM part-1)
(a) In view of the interlocking provided between related functions in conformity with essentials
of interlocking, the 'OFF' position of a signal ensures that the points etc., are correctly set
and locked and so long as the signal lever is in the reverse position, it should not be possible
to alter the position of points, Lockbars, level crossing gates etc., This ensures safety, as the
route is held/locked for a train as long as the signal is in 'OFF'. If the signal lever is
normalised, when a train is approaching the signal and if the train is far away from the signal
it may be possible for the driver to stop his train short of the signal on seeing the signal
going back to 'ON'. But if the signal is put back to 'ON' when the train is close to the signal,
then there is the possibility of either the driver not seeing the signal going back to 'ON' or
even if he has seen, it may not be possible to stop the train short of the signal. With the
result of signal lever put back to normal position, there will be no interlocking effective
between the signal and the other functions, and therefore the route can be changed by
unlocking and altering the position of points in the face of an approaching train. To avoid
such a danger, the route must remain locked and unchanged when the train is on the
approach of the signal and such a locking is termed as "approach locking" and is usually
provided in areas equipped with power signalling installations.
(b) And also but if the signal lever is normalised after the train has been passed the signal even
the limited protection indicated above is not available, as the driver is completely unaware
of the signal having been normalised. Once the signal lever is put back to normal, the points
can be unlocked and position altered. This is dangerous. Therefore, once the train passes
the signal, the route must remain locked i.e., held unchanged for the train till such time the
train has actually passed over all the points even though the signal lever might have been
put back to normal. This is termed as "Route Holding".
(c) Since the route can not be altered as long as the signal is in ' OFF ' position one method by
which the route can be held for a train is to ensure that the signal lever can not be restored
to the normal position till such time the train has actually traversed the entire route.
(d) The method suggested above may require track circuits over the entire route and an electric
lever lock on the signal lever so that it is not possible to normalise the signal lever unless the
train has cleared the entire route. Provision of track circuit may not be practicable at all
wayside stations, in view of the heavy expenditure involved and therefore, some other
method must be employed to hold the route. This is achieved with the help of the Lockbars
and interlocking between successive Lockbars.
(e) Lockbars are working in conjunction with facing point locks, which are used to lock the
points, once the Lockbar lever is operated, the points get locked at site in the position in
which it was lying prior to the operation of the Lockbar and the point position can not be
altered unless the point is first unlocked. For unlocking the point, the Lockbar lever has to
be normalised which is not possible when a train is on that Lockbar. Therefore if the Lockbar
can not be normalised, the point can not be unlocked and its position would remain
unaltered. This gives us an application by which the route can be held.
(f) Referring to Fig. 2.8.5 points 8 and 11 have to be first locked in the normal position by
operating Lockbar levers 7 and 10 to reverse before the signal No.3 for main line is taken
'OFF'. Once the signal lever is operated to reverse, the Lockbar levers get back locked and
can not be put back to normal. This protection is available so long as the signal lever has not
been normalised.
(g) But once the signal lever is normalised, the interlocking between the signal lever and the
Lockbar levers is released and therefore, the point position can be changed after unlocking
them. But, if the distance between the signal No.3 and the point No.8 can be kept restricted
such that before the cabinman has had time to normalise the Lockbar lever No.7 (after
normalising the signal lever), the train has already been on the Lockbar No.7, then, even
though the interlocking on lever No.7 is free, it is not possible to normalise the Lockbar as
the train is physically on it. If the Lockbar can not be normalised, the position of the point
also can not be changed. This way point No.8 is held for the train even though the signal
lever No.3 has been put back to normal.
(h) But how can the route holding be extended to point No.11 which is a little away from signal
No.3? Because of the longer distance involved, the cabin man, after normalising the signal
lever, may have enough time to normalise Lockbar lever No. 10 which is locking point No.11.
Once the Lockbar lever is normalised, the point position can be changed. To prevent this,
interlocking between successive Lockbars in the route is introduced in such a way that the
lever of Lockbar in advance can not be normalised unless the lever of Lockbar in rear has
first been normalised. In the present situation, the Lockbar lever No.10 can not be
normalised unless Lockbar lever No.7 is normalised which is not possible as long as a train is
on lockbar 7. Now if we restrict the distance between those two successive points and the
successive Lockbars, such that, by the time the cabin man is able to normalise Lockbar lever
No.10 after the train has cleared the Lockbar No.7 and 7 is normalised, the train already
would have reached on Lockbar 10, then the point No.11 is also held by the train. By
extending similar interlocking between all the Lockbars, all the facing points in the route
advance of the train can be held till the train actually clears them.
(i) The time interval that lapses from the instant the signal lever has been put back to normal
to the instant when the train actually occupies the first Lockbar, or the time interval that
lapses between the instant the train clears the Lockbar in rear and the instant it occupies
the Lockbar immediately in advance is the crucial factor in the satisfactory working of the
above method. In other words the distance between the signal and the first facing point and
the distance between successive facing points has to be limited and Para 7.83 of Signal
Engineering Manual 1988 specifies that this distance should not be more than 180 Meters.
(j) If the distance becomes more than 180 Meters then an additional lockbar called Lock
Retaining Bar (sometimes called holding bar) has to be introduced between the signal and
the first facing point or between two successive facing points. In such cases, the distance
between any two adjacent functions i.e., the signal and the Lock Retaining Bar and the
Lockbar of the facing point is not more than 180 Meters Interlocking also shall be provided
between successive Lockbars in a route such that the Lockbar in advance can not be
normalised unless the Lockbar/Lock Retaining Bar in rear has been normalised. It will be
seen later on that, this is the same relationship as Lockbar in rear released by Lockbar in
advance.
(a) If the system of working is such that enough time would have lapsed between the instant the
cabin man puts back the signal to ON to the instant when he is in a position to operate the
point and during this time if the train would have actually cleared the route, then, special
arrangements for holding the route are not necessary. An example of this type of working is
the Route Key Method employed in Double Wire Cabins or Standard-I interlocking with
locally operated key locked points.
(k) The factors by which route holding is achieved (in the above methods) are:-
(i) The Interlocking between the signal and the facing points and the Lockbars, results the
points can not be unlocked and altered unless the signal lever is normalised.
(ii) The distance between the signal and the first facing point and the distance between
successive facing points (which is limited to 180 Meters) and the interlocking between
successive Lockbars due to which it is ensured that the cabinman can not unlock any
facing point in the face of an approaching train even though concerned signal has been
put back to normal behind the train.
(iii) The very purpose of the lockbar on the facing point is such that the point can not be
unlocked when the train is passing over the Lockbars.
(iv) Where the distance from the signal to the first facing point or from one facing point to
next facing point is more than 180 Meters provision of lock retaining bar/bars ensures
route holding. In the case of successive facing points, the Lockbar of a facing point in the
rear serves as a lock-retaining bar for the facing point Lockbar in advance of it. This is
ensured by interlocking between successive Lockbars.
(l) The following are the provisions of 7.83 SEM part-1 in this connection
(i) The signal must be located as close as possible to the points which it protects.
(ii) Where the signal cannot be located within 180 Meters from the first facing point
which it protects, and where the distance between successive facing points is more
than 180 Meters special methods of route holding must be employed as indicated in
the Paras above.
(iii) Such methods are unnecessary if the method of working is such that the sufficient
time lapses between the instant the signal lever was put back to normal and to the
instant that the point levers are in a position to be operated and by that time train
must have actually cleared the route.
(m) At a station where trains run through at speeds more than 50 KMPH, such arrangements are
also required to hold the route are also required in case of trailing points situated more than
180 Meters from the signal controlling them. However such arrangements are not required
if the points are locked in either position by the signal in advance 7.83(2) of SEM part-1
Q13: What do you mean by "Loose" and "Tight" locking in Railway signalling? Please
explain with examples.
CHAPTER – 10: TIGHT AND LOOSE LOCKING
10.1 It is seen from the proceeding chapter that by using a clutch lever interlocking can be extended
right up to the function. The integrity of the wire transmission can not be taken for granted and
therefore there is a possibility of the function not responding to the action of the lever. The lever and its
function may be out of correspondence with each other.
10.2 When a clutch lever is used and when there is out of correspondence between the lever and its
function or when the transmission is defective, the lever drum alone is made to rotate and the lever is
said to trip. The rotation of the drum results in a stroke on the locking plunger.
10.3 The stroke on the locking plunger can be caused either by the tripping of the lever if the lever
happens to be a clutch lever or by the operation of the lever, the stroke in the two cases being 1/2 "
(12mm) and 11/2 " (40 mm) respectively. As the movement of the plunger can be made use of to lock
another function, the movement due to the out of correspondence between the function and the lever
can also be used to lock another function, i.e., the interlocking is extended right up to the function.
10.4 For example, let the locking relationship between two levers 1 and 2 be such that 1 locks 2. With
the transmission of lever No.1 becoming defective, it may so happen that while lever No.1 is in the
normal position the function No.1 may not be in normal position. It is desirable to lock lever No.2 in
normal position if either the lever No.1 is not in normal position or the function No.1 is not in normal
position. To achieve this, a Clutch lever has to be provided for function No.1. In this case in a situation
when lever No.1 is in normal position and function No.1 is not in normal position lever No.1 would trip
causing a tripping stroke on plunger No.1, which can be made use of to lock lever No.2. In the notes on
double wire, it has been explained that the stroke on the plunger due to tripping action is in the same
direction in which the plunger moved last. In figure No.7 operation of lever No.1 from N to R, causes a 1
1/2"(40 mm) downward displacement of its lock plunger while tripping of lever in N position will cause a
1/2" (12 mm) upward displacement thereby also displacing the lock and locking the lever No.2. (The
displacement is upwards because the last operation was from reverse to normal when the lock plunger
would have moved upwards and the displacement due to tripping is in the same direction as the
direction in which the plunger moved last). Similarly, by providing a Clutch lever for function No.2 lever
No.1 can be locked either when lever No.2 is operated or when lever No.2 has tripped.
When the tripping action of a lever results in the locking of another lever it is known as
tight locking (+)
1X2+ Moves 12 mm
up when
2X1+ Trips in normal
Fig. 7
10.5 The above, where not only the position of the lever, but also the position of the function is
proved, seems to be a desirable feature and calls for universal application. But there are certain
limitations.
FUNCTION OF PCB'S IN FTG-S FRAME
10.6 It can be seen from Fig.8 and the explanation given in succeeding paragraphs that the advantage of
locking due to tripping can be made use of only once in a group of related levers. Let us consider the
relationship between three levers 1, 3 & 5. Let the locking relationship be 1 x 3, 5. Supposing it is
desired that the tripping action of 1 should also lock 3 and 5. Let the sequence of operation between 3
and 5 is Such that 3 is operated first before 5 is operated. If the transmission of 1 goes defective with
both levers 3 and 5 in normal position, then plunger No.1 will have the tripping stroke, and it will lock
plunger 3 and 5. But if the transmission of 1 goes defective after lever No.3 is operated, lock plunger of
lever No.1 can not move, even though the lever might trip as the lock plunger of lever No.1 is locked by
the operation of lever No.3 and therefore locking of lever No.5 can not be achieved. In other words
tripping of lever No.1 will result in locking of lever No.5 only with lever No.3 in the normal position. But
5 may be in important function and it may be necessary to have the tripping of 1 to lock lever No.5 even
with lever No.3 operated to reverse position.
X Direction of Plunger movement when lever

No.1 trips in normal position
Y Direction of Plunger movement when lever

No.1 trips in reverse position
Fig.8
10.7 From Fig.8, it is evident that if this is to be achieved, locked plunger No.1 should be free to have
its upward displacement due to tripping even with lever No. 3 in the reverse position. If this is to
happen the notch on the lock plunger No.1 for the locking 1 x 3 and 1 x 5 should be separate and also
the notch pertaining to 1 x 3 should not be of the same size as the lock (as shown in figure 8) but should
be wider in the bottom by 1/2" (12 mm) (since the stroke due to tripping is 1/2" (12 mm) (as shown in
fig.9). In this case, if lever No.1 trips after lever No.3 has been operated to reverse, plunger No.1 will still
have the full upward displacement in the event of its tripping. This will displace the lock on channel C
resulting in the locking of lever No.5.
The notch, which is not exact to the size of the lock, is termed as a "loose notch". The notch
which is exact to the size of the lock is termed as a "tight notch".
Fig.9
The notch on lever no.1 in 'A' channel is loose therefore even after lever no.3 is reversed the
plunger of lever no.1 is allowed to move up if it trips, thus locking lever no.5 as lock of lever no.1 in ‘C’
channel is displaced due to tripping.
10.8 Cutting the notch wider than the size of the lock does not in any way affect the locking due to
lever action. This is evident from fig.9. Once lever No.3 is reversed lever No.1 is free to trip but not free
to operate from the normal position, as the plunger can not move downwards due to the top portion of
notch on Channel 'A' being exact to the size of the lock. Similarly, when lever No.1 is operated to
reverse position the lock is moved to the right thereby locking lever No.3. But cutting the notch 'loose'
in the bottom in A channel of plunger No.1 will not lock lever No.3 in the event of lever No.1 tripping in
normal.
10.9 When the tripping results in the locking action of another lever, the locking is said to be 'tight'
(+) and when the tripping does not result in the locking action of another lever, the locking is said to be
loose (*).
10.10 To sum up, if tripping of lever No.1 should lock up lever No.5 then the notch on plunger No.1 for
the relationship between levers 1 and 3 should be loose. In this case tripping of lever No.1 will not lock
up lever No.3. On the other hand if the tripping of lever No.1 should lock up lever No.3 then the notch
on lever No.1 for the relationship between 1 and 3 should be tight. To realize this, the notch on lever 1
for the locking between 1 and 5 should be loose, which means that tripping of lever 1 will not lock up
lever No.5. Hence we can say that in a group of related levers the advantage of tight locking can be
made use of once only.
Therefore, as far as locking action due to tripping of lever No.1 is concerned a choice has to be
made between levers 3 and 5. If it is to be available for lever No.5, it should not have been made use of
for lever No.3 and if it has been made use of for lever No.3 it is not to be available for lever No.5. In such
cases, the choice normally lies on the lever which is more important for safety.
10.11 Another limitation is brought about due to operational necessity. If safety is not jeopardized,
then in the interest of flexibility, loose locking may be provided. As an example consider the relationship
between a trailing point in the overlap and a signal. Safety will not be jeopardized even if the signal is
taken 'OFF' with the point incorrectly set. The provision of a tight locking in this case will result in a
signal failure if the point lever trips due to defective transmission, incorrect setting or some such cause.
Therefore, to prevent a signal failure, loose locking may be provided if safety is not jeopardized.
10.12 Doubt may now arise as to why at all a clutch lever should be provided if the tripping action is
not to be made use of. Even though loose locking may be provided for the relationship with certain
levers, in view of the two limitations indicated above, there may be certain other levers with which the
relationship should be tight, in the interest of safety. In the case considered in Para 10.10 above, the
point may be a facing point lying in the portion traveled by a train and governed by another signal and
the relationship with this signal has to be a tight relationship as the positions of the point lever and the
point function are very important as far as this signal is concerned. Tight locking should be provided in
this case. Since the same point requires a loose as well as tight relationship, a clutch lever has to be
provided.
10.13 In the case of a direct lever, there is no question of tripping and therefore, there is no choice of
'loose' or 'tight' locking. All the notches in the plunger of a direct lever are exact to the size of the lock.
10.14 A tight locking is indicated by the sign + and loose locking by the sign * in the locking tables and
in the locking diagrams. For example, if the relationship between levers 4 and 5 is Such that 4 locks 5
and if tripping of lever No.4 should lock lever No.5 the relationship is expressed as 5 x 4 +. Similarly, if the
tripping of lever No.4 is not to lock lever No.5, the relationship is expressed as 5 x 4*. The sign +
represents that the notch on lever No.4 is 'tight' and the * represents that the notch on lever No. 4 is
'loose'.
***
Q14: What do you mean by Ballast Resistance? What are the minimum permissible
values for the ballast resistance in the station yard and in the Block section?
BALLAST RESISTANCE
It is the net resistance of various leakage paths across track circuit rails offered
by ballast and sleepers. The longer track circuits, more is the number of these leakage
paths in parallel with each other and hence lesser becomes the net ballast resistance.
Also leakage current through each path goes up with increase in dampness
added to the ballast dustcoat. Clean ballast free from dust or soil is not a good
conductor. The ballast resistance falls to its lowest value during the first showers of
monsoon. When rain water flows over it and washes dust off, the ballast resistance
improves again. A good drainage is essential to avoid water logging and for maintaining
a higher ballast resistance. Periodical screening of the ballast is not only necessary to
improve the strength of track bed. It also improves the track circuit ballast resistance.
VR VR
IF IR
A A
TR
Fig.No.1.7 (a)
1.7.1 CALCULATION OF BALLAST RESISTANCE IN A D.C. TRACK CIRCUIT

Measure the voltages and currents as shown. The Ballast Resistance can be
calculated from: - VF + VR
2(IF – IR)
(i.e. Average Rail Voltage)

Leakage Current
Knowing the length of track circuit, R B per Kilometer can be found out.
In the case of a Track Circuit working on AC., the ballast resistance can be found from: -
RB = V0.4/I0
Where, V0.4 = Voltages across rails at 0.4 length from the Feed End
I0 = The Feed End current when the relay end leads are not
connected.
0.4 L
V V 0.4
L
F
A I0
i
1.7.2 MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE BALLAST RESISTANCE FOR TRACK CIRCUITS
It is specified as: -
(a) 2  per Kilometer track length in station yard; and

(b) 4  per Kilometer track length - block section (as here, better drainage
can be provided, the track being free from all line connections).
Note: Wherever PSC (Pre-Stressed Concrete) sleepers are used, availability of insulated
liners up to a minimum level of 97% shall be ensured.
As water seeps through wooden sleepers more easily than passing over the
hard surface of concrete sleepers, the ballast resistance of a concrete sleeper track
circuit is always less than that of wooden sleeper track circuits in monsoon. Also, the
capacitance effect of reinforcing rods in a concrete sleeper drains some more current
from the rails to charge itself. Hence, leakage currents are more in concrete sleeper
track circuits.
The basis for arriving at the Minimum Ballast Resistance value of 1  /Km in
non-RE areas is as follows: -
In 1 Km length of track, about 1500 sleepers are provided. If on an average,

each sleeper, with rubber padding under the rails and neoprone liners under pandrol
clips offers at least 1500  resistance in parallel with damp ballast, the net resistance
amounts to 1  per Kilometer.
In RE area, as one rail of single rail track circuit is maintained at earth potential,
that rail leaks more current to earth.
1.8 MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE RESISTANCE OF A CONCRETE SLEEPER
Type of Area Minimum Permissible Resistance Of A Concrete Sleeper
500 after six months from the date of

(a) In Non - RE and manufacture.
AC RE area
800  for Single Rail Track Circuits of up to 200m
length and Double Rail Track circuits of up to
(b) In
400m length.
DC RE
area. 1000  for Single Rail track circuits of more than
200m length and Double Rail Track circuits of
more than 400m length.
Q15: What do you mean by the staggering of adjacent track circuit rail polarities and why is this required?
2.2 STAGGERING OF ADJOINING TRACK CIRCUIT RAIL POLARITIES AND
THEIR IMPORTANCE
1
SHUNT
+ +
1T 2T
- -
2
1TR 2TR
Fig.No.2.2 (a)
In the arrangement shown in fig.2.2 (a), similar feed polarities are connected to
the adjoining track circuit rails. Here, failure of one of the two block joints No.1 or No.2
can go undetected, as it does not drop the track relay on either side. But later, if the
second block joint also fails, both the track circuit feeds come in parallel.
When 1T is shunted by a vehicle at the feed end, its own feed is effectively shunted. But 1TR may not drop
due to its proximity to the feed of 2T, while the shunt is remotely connected making it less effective. This is an unsafe
condition, which should be avoided.
1
SHUNT
+ -
1T
- + 2T
2
1TR 2TR
Fig.No.2.2 (b)
In the arrangement shown in fig.2.2 (b), the polarities of track feed across the
block joints in between are not similar. So, when both the block joints No.1 & No.2 fail,
both the track feeds get connected, +ve to -ve and -ve to +ve with high circulating
current in between. The track relays 1TR and 2TR also come across this circuit
separately in parallel. With this, the voltage across the relays gets reduced. As a result,
either 1TR or 2TR or both may drop, according to the fall of track voltage, even without
a shunt across. However, the track relay across which there is a shunt cannot pick up in
any case.
Hence, to make the track circuit working safe at the time of block joint failures,
it is necessary that the track feed polarities are staggered in continuously track circuited
sections.
Q16: List the names of various types of traction bonds used in RE area using DC track
circuits.
TRACTION BONDS
(a) Structural Bond.
(b) Transverse Bond.
(c) Cross Bond.

(d) Longitudinal Bonds (Continuity)
However in between two consecutive track circuits insulated joints are provided
on both the rails so as to be able to maintain 'Staggered' track circuit polarities. Also
the negative rails of adjoining track circuits are provided with a cross connection-
bonding strip in between, known as 'Transverse Bond'. This transverse bond (i)
facilitates passing of traction return current ahead from one track circuit to the other
and also (ii) helps in detecting a block joint (insulated rail joint) failure between the two
track circuits.
INSULATED RAIL 1
T.B T.B
UN-INSULATED 2
RAIL
TRACK
FEED
1TR 2TR
Fig.No.2.4
When block Joint No.1 fails, 1TR drops as its feed gets short circuited and when
block joint No.2 fails, 2TR drops as its feed gets short circuited.
The rail at whose block joint, traction return current flow is stopped is called the
'Insulated Rail'. The rail at whose block joint, traction return current is given an
alternate path through transverse bonds is called the 'Un-Insulated Rail'.
2.5 CROSS BONDING OF UNINSULATED TRACK CIRCUIT RAILS
Uninterrupted flow of traction return currents through track circuit rails shall be
ensured to avoid their interference with track circuit working.
Rail Breakage
X
TRACK
FEED EQPT.
TR
Fig.No.2.5 (a)
In case there is a break in the traction return path of track circuit as shown, the
heavy traction return current passes through the track feed source to the insulated rail
and returns to the uninsulated rail through the track relay at the other end to go further
ahead.
OHE Mast
STRUCTURAL BOND
CROSS BOND
Fig.No.2.5 (b)
This can cause unsafe conditions in track circuit working. To avoid this, an
alternate path shall be available for traction return current in such circumstances.
SCRAP RAIL
Fig.No.2.5 (c)
In multiple line sections traction return rails in track circuits are cross connected
with bonding straps at an interval of about 100metres in between them.
Also, beyond the last track circuit very close to the block joints, a cross bond is
provided across to connect the two track rails.
Q17: Write down the adjustment of DC track circuit for failsafe and reliable working.
(a) First the highest possible (infinite) ballast resistance condition is erected by directly
connecting the feed and regulating resistance in series to the track relay excluding track
rails from the circuit, in case the length of track lead cables is more, the voltage drop in
them shall be reckoned and the relay voltage readings shall be corrected to exclude this
voltage drop.
(i) Minimum permissible TSR (0.5) shall be connected across the relay. The relay voltage
shall be adjusted to 85% of its drop away value by choosing the correct tapping on the
regulating device.
TSR
TR
Fig.No.2.8 (a)
(ii) Now, the shunt resistance shall be disconnected and the relay voltage shall be
measured. If it is more than required value it shall be brought down by increasing the
regulating resistance suitably.
The required value is 250% of pickup value for Shelf type Track relays 300% of Pickup value for Plug in Type
Track relays except QBAT & 235% of the pickup value for QBAT.
RT
TR
Fig.No.2.8 (b)
(a) It is now necessary to check whether the minimum required voltage is available on the relay under minimum ballast resistance
and normal feed voltage conditions. Also, in this condition, rail Voltage drop cannot be ignored, as the relay voltage is just
sufficient. Hence, the track is included in the circuit, by connecting the feed set and the relay to it at their respective ends. It
shall now be checked if the relay has a voltage not less than 125% of its pickup value except QBAT & for QBAT it shall not be
less than the 122% of its pickup value.
However, the relay voltage shall not be increased now if found to be less, as in that case an improved ballast
resistance condition can make the track circuit working unsafe. During the time of minimum ballast resistance condition,
the track circuit shall be divided into two or more portions with separate relays. The feeding of these track portions is
done as below:-
5(1)TR
5(1)TR 5TR
Fig.No.2.8 (c)
This arrangement is known as 'fed over' or 'cut section' track circuit

arrangement. The relay connected to the last portion of the track is treated as the track
relay of the entire. Section involved for the purpose of detection and other controls.
Q18: What do you mean by Fouling Protection of Track? Please explain.

3.11 TRACK CIRCUITING AT FOULING MARKS & PROTECTION
3m
F.M
Fig.No.3.12
(a) A track circuit shall extend beyond fouling marks on both straight road and diversion
portions to afford protection to the standing vehicles. In case, it is not possible to provide
the block joints beyond fouling marks on any portion, the point operation to a position
connecting the fouled line is prevented until the time the fouling vehicle clears the adjoining
track circuit also.
(b) With parallel connection of turnout track circuits, the non-clearance of fouling mark by a
vehicle may not be detected when any connection in the parallel portion is broken. This
shall be checked and avoided especially in case of the 1 in 8 1/2 and 1 in 12 turnouts.
Hence, it is preferable to have series connection track circuits to have fouling mark
protection on running lines.
(c) The end position block joints on turnout track circuits shall be so located that not only the
last axle wheels but also the overhanging portions of vehicle (1.8m) clear the fouling mark
before the track relay picks up. So, in case of Crossovers, Block joints shall be provided from
the Fouling mark at a distance of NOT LEES THAN 3m.
Q19: What is Dead Section in track circuit area and how can it be eliminated?
DEAD SECTIONS IN TRACK CIRCUITS
These are defined as those portions of track circuits in which occupation by a

vehicle cannot be detected. This may be due to the vehicle shunting rails of the same
track feed polarity. This may also be due to one or both rails of that portion being
bypassed by the track feed.
The following are some of the examples where dead sections occur: -
(a) The block joints position on track rails is staggered either
(i) due to unequal rail creep, particularly on curved tracks.
Fig.No.3.17 (i)
D.S
or (ii) due to rail ends on cross-overs being out of square:-
Fig.No.3.17 (ii)
(b) A track portion is excluded from track circuit either
(i) due to a level crossing road not allowing track circuiting of the covered area of track:
LEVELCROSSING
Fig.No.3.17 (iii)
or (ii) due to a bridge or culvert being under the track.
BRIDGE
F
i
or (iii) due to a tram line passing across the railway track.
RLY TRACK
Fig.No.3.17 (v)
While allowing for dead sections in track circuits, the following precautions shall
be taken so as to avoid unsafe conditions of traffic over them: -
 The dead section shall not accommodate a four-wheeler vehicle entirely in itself
without shunting any 'live' portion of the track circuit at the same time.
In B.G sections, the distance between the two axles of a four-wheeler is 6m (20')
and in MG /NG sections, it is 3.6m (12').
Fig.No.3.17 (vi)
6m in BG
3.6 m in M.G/N.G
MG/NG
 If one trolley of an eight-wheeler gets entirely accommodated in a dead section, the
second trolley of the same vehicle shall not go beyond the live portion of that track
circuit in either direction.
In B.G sections, the distance between the two axles of this trolley is 1.8m (6') and in
MG/NG sections, it is 1.125m (3'9").
In this case, the track circuit shall extend on either side of dead section by more than
12m (40').
Fig.No.3.17 (vii)
1.8 m
11.7 m (39')
in BG
1.125m in
MG/NG
 If the dead section is longer than 10.8m(36') as in the case of long bridges
underneath the track, a 'Trap Circuit' shall be provided including the control of dead
section track by two other track circuits on either side as shown.
Q20: What do you mean by cut section track circuit and/or fed over track circuits?
CUT SECTION TRACK CIRCUITS OR FED OVER TRACK CIRCUITS
This is an arrangement in which a track circuit is split into two or more sections
with individual track relays and the feed for each latter section is controlled by the relay
of former section.
6(i)T 6(ii)T 6T
TN TB
6(i)TR 6(ii)TR
6(i)TR 6(ii)TR 6TR
6(i)TR 6(ii)TR
TB TN TN TB
Fig.No.3.19 (a)
This is generally adopted when it is not possible to work a long track circuit due
to the deteriorated condition of its ballast resistance, till the ballast condition is
improved. The higher net ballast resistance of each portion as compared to its net
value of the whole length of track makes this arrangement workable.
This is also adopted in automatic signalling sections wherein the last control
track circuit of each automatic signal is fed over the overlap track circuit of that signal.
This method of control is termed as 'Automatic overlap system'.
S101 S103 S105
A1T 101T 101AT 103T 103AT 103BT 105T
Fig.No.3.19 (b)
In this arrangement, when 101 ATR goes down, 103TR which also controls S103
is still picked up but when 103TR goes down, 101ATR cannot pickup until 103T is also
cleared by the running train. Thus while 101AT controls only S101, 103T controls both
S101 and S103.
Q21: Can an AFTC be used in a track section with steel sleepers? Why?
Q22: What do you mean by "End Fed" and "Centre Fed" types of AFTCs along-with
corresponding maximum permissible lengths of track circuits?
Three modes of connections are adopted for FTGS-depend on the length of

section and location
(a) STANDARD LAYOUT

EFFECTIVE LENGTH
F5 F1 F3
SIGNAL &
BOX &
12 V DC / 5V DC 220V 50 Hz
(b) CENTRE FED LAYOUT
EFFECTIVE LENGTH
F5 F1 F1 F3
1 2
&
&
12 V DC / 5V DC 220V 50 Hz
(c) POINT LAYOUT

F1 F3
F5 F1 F4
1 2
&
&
12 V DC / 5V DC 220V 50 Hz
Q23: What are the various types of Bonds being used in AFTCs?
TRACK CIRCUIT DELIMITATION BY SECTION DIVIDER BONDS
9m
9m PTG S 46 6.7 m FTG S 46 6.7 m
1.75m 6.7 m
3.2m 3.2m FTGS 917 FTGS 917
'S' BOND OF STEEL ALFA BONDS

WIRE ROPE 16mm dia. GALVANISED STEEL WIRE ROPE
IN BET. TWO AFTC'S 16mm dia. AT THE END OF THE AFTC
S-BOND - This connector is built of two semi loops each delimited between its
center tap and its connection point to the rail. This along with the rail of this
region forms the inductive branch of a parallel-resonated circuit. The discrete
capacitors of tuning unit make its capacitive branch.
TR TR
RECEIVER (f1) RECEIVER (f3)
AXLE (f1) (f3)

C1 C1
TX (f1)
The more distant semi loop of the two S-bonds delimiting a track section is tuned to the
operating frequency of track circuit. Feed is applied to the resonated semi loop circuit causing
its transmitter to consume little energy. The other semi loop of section divider is tuned to the
operating frequency of neighboring track circuit. Due to the layout of semi loops in the S-bond,
an axle standing on the S-bond occupies both the near and advance track circuits. This S-bond
causes overlapping, of the two track circuits so that there is no detection gap.
In the last AFTC of a region, End bonds (Alfa bonds) are provided at their exact delimitation or
for their transition to other types of track circuits with block joints in between
Q24: Please list the names of the constituent parts of a Electrical Lever Lock and its
functioning.
LEVER LOCKS AND CIRCUIT CONTROLLERS.
1 INTRODUCTION: In mechanical installations the functions are operated by a lever through a
mechanical rigid means i.e. for points by rod transmissions and for signals by wire
transmission. In Electro-mechanical installations the functions are operated by mechanical
lever without any rigid connection. Because of this the function may go out of
correspondence with the lever. To avoid this condition over the mechanical lever different
electrical locking are required to provide. This will be done by means of “Electrical lever lock”
1.1 Electric Lever Lock: Electric lever lock is used where an electrical control on a mechanical
lever is required. Levers controlling points and signals are equipped with electric locks to
prevent or limit their movements. The lock pawl holds the lever mechanically so that the
lever cannot be operated when the condition for its operation is not safe. In figure 1.1 shown
the armature extension (lock pawl) engages in the notch cut on the lever plunger (slide) in
order to lock the lever when the electro-magnet is de-energised. Consequently, the lever
cannot be operated till the lever lock coil is energised. When the armature is attracted and
the lock comes out of the notch on the lever slide and permitting the plunger to move.
30
Fig. 1.1 LEVER LOCK

1.2 Lever lock consists of
a} Electromagnet,
b) Force drop device,
c) Economiser contact and
d) Lock proving contact.
1.2.1 Electromagnet: The armature and magnet core are laminated and shading bands are fixed
on the pole faces to ensure quiet and efficient operation when used on alternating current.
1.2.2 Force drop device: Some times the armature of the lever lock may not release after de-
energisation of lock coil due to residual magnetism or any other mechanical holding which
may lead to unsafe conditions by allowing the lock to release without proving the required
safety condition. To ensure that the lock pawl is positively pushed inside the locking notch
before every unlocking operation, a mechanical arrangement called “Force drop” is
provided. The force drop pins/nibs are riveted on the slide and a bevel shaped extension is
provided on the lock pawl. The force drop pins/nibs force the lock pawl to drop into the
locking notch through its bevel shaped extension before each pick up.
1.2.3 Economiser contact: The economiser contact is provided with the electric lever lock and
circuit controllers to cut off the power to the lock coil at the end of each stroke. It makes
between A and E positions of the lever and remains disconnected in N and R positions of
the lever. This connects supply to lock coil proving other required conditions after initiating
31
the operation of the lever from its Normal or Reverse position thus economising the power
consumption. In absence of "Economiser contact" the same purpose is served by AE band
of circuit controller. In both the cases feed is disconnected in 'N' or 'R' position of the lever.
Initial feed is controlled by track clear condition as shown in Fig 1.3.
Fig. 1.2 ECONOMISER CONTACT
Fig. 1.3 LOCK PROVING CONTACTS
1.2.4 Lock proving contacts: A set of contacts are actuated when the lock is de-energised and
lock pawl drops into the locking notch, proving that the lever is locked positively. An
electrical circuit taken through these proving contact, proves that the armature is de-
energised and consequently the lever is locked. Fig 1.3
1.3 Indication locking circuit: It is a locking provided on B AND D position of point lever slide
and in the case of signals on B position only.
Fig.1.4A INDICATION CIRCUIT
1.4 Track locking circuit: Held in lever lock is released when the lever is either in A or B position
with track clear condition. Locking of the point levers provides a safeguard against the
derailment during hand signalled movement. Since track locking and indication locking are
provided on the point lever, combined track locking and indication locking is used as shown
in fig. 1.5
32
Fig.1.4B TRACK LOCKING CIRCUIT
Fig. 1.5 COMBINED CKT OF TRACK AND INDICATION LOCKING
1.5 Circuit Controllers: Circuit Controller is a device by which electrical circuits can be made or
broken according to requirements. It has generally got the two sets of fixed contacts and
corresponding numbers of rotating contacts. The rotating contacts may be of different
positions such as N,R., NB, RD, etc. The contact segments are rotated by a plunger
connected to the lever. Each rotating segment can be adjusted in steps of few degree (3 ¾
deg in SGE circuit controller) and locked in position. Though the lever lock and circuit
controllers may be used separately, they can also be combined together on a lever lock and
circuit controller.
A sketch showing the relative positions of circuit controller contacts to that of the lever
controlling them are shown in Fig.1.6 for converting the linear motion of the plunger to the
circular motion of the contact segments, different methods such as cam path, rack and
toothed sector, crank motion etc., are used by different manufacturers.
33
N = Full normal position of lever.

A = Normal Economiser Position.
B = Normal Indication Position.
C = Centre position
D = Reverse Indication position.
R = Full Reverse Position.
34
Fig. 1.6 CIRCUIT CONTROLLERS
Q25:: What do you mean by Indication Locking and Track Locking and on which levers
these are being used?
Q26: Explain the working of Snubbing Circuit in Point machine operation using 3-wire
control.
Snubbing Circuits: At the completion of point throw and locking, the cut off contacts
ensure that the supply to the point motor is cut off, but the momentum of the
motor will keep it running. The presence of the clutch between the point motor
and the throw rods which are connected in the switch rails ensures that undue
strain on the motor will not take place. In addition to this, to provide a smoother
stopping, an electrical circuit may be provided, by which the kinetic energy of the
motor is dissipated and the point motor is brought to a smoother stop. It is
mostly employed in high speed machines. Some of the snubbing circuits
employed are discussed below
Snubbing circuits are completed through

a) snubbing relay contact,
b) directional contact and
c) a half wave rectifier.
4.12.1 Snubbing relay contact : In point machine a snubbing relay is used. The
snubbing relay remains energised throughout the operation of point machine
and at the end of the operation when the feed to the point motor is cut off, the
snubbing relay drops. Through the back contact of this relay and the reverse or
normal snubbing contact (RS-makes in reverse position) armature and the field
winding are short circuited. When one field widning is used for working the
motor, the other field winding is used for snubbing. When the armature and field
are short circuited, the induced current develops an opposite torque which
causes motor to stop smoothly. Refer Fig.No.4.11.
Fig No : 4.11.SNUBBING BY USING RELAY CONTACT
Q27: What is the concept of Cross protection in signalling circuits? Please explain.
35 | P a g e
Q28: Explain the working of 4-wire point detection circuit using circuit diagram.
Four wire detection: (Refer Fig.4. 19).
In this detection, 4 wires are used between the relays and the nearest detector.
Since two neutral relays are used, there is a possibility of both relays picking up
at the same time. To prevent this the back contact of RWKR is used in NWKR
circuit and the back contact of NWKR is used in RWKR circuit. To ensure
correspondence between the lever and the function, the concerned lever
contacts also can be used.
In the above-mentioned point indication circuits cross protection arrangements

are not provided. During the operation of the point neither the normal detection
contacts nor the reverse detection contacts are available and hence the relay is
de-energised. In this position, to prevent the relay being energised by a cross
feed, an arrangement is provided by which the indication relay is shunted by a
detector contact which makes only during the operation of points.
Q29: What do you mean by super imposed detection of points? As per the latest
directives of Railway Board, is it suggested to use this arrangement?
Super Imposed Detection: Normally, separate sets of wires are used for point control
and point indication circuits. I.e For point operation 3 conductors and point
indication circuits 4 conductors are used i.e total 7 conductors are required for
point operation and point detection . To effect economy on line wires and give
greater protection against the external feeds, the idle point control and the return
wires are used for indication and when such an arrangement is known as "super-
imposed detection". Normally point control supply is DC and indication supply is
AC. The indication circuit voltage is kept low, so that the motor operation cannot
take place while the indication is being given. In this arrangement only 4
conductors are used for both point operation and detection circuits.
36 | P a g e
Fig No : 4.20 SUPER IMPOSED CIRCUIT
Q30: Write down the general features of IRS Rotary Type point machines with 143 mm stroke.
Q31: Explain the working of Point operation circuit using Siemens Point Contactor unit in an
electromechanical installation.
Q32: What do you mean by RHS and LHS turnouts? Can we use the same type of Point
machine (IRS Rotary type) for both the turnouts? Please explain.
Q33: Compare different types of conventional signal lamps.
Q34:: What are the different types of ECRs being used with conventional signal lamps?
Q35: What are Triple Pole lamps? Describe their merits over Double pole lamps.
Q36: What do you mean by H-Type, I-Type and L-Type signal transformers along-with
their uses?
Q37: What is Aspect Control and Aspect Control circuits? Draw an aspect control circuit for an inner distant
signal in Double Distant signalling territory.
Q38: What is cascading of signal aspects? Explain with suitable circuit diagram.
Q39: What do you mean by Red Lamp Protection? Expalin with suitable diagrams.
Q40: What do you mean by Cutting in Arrangement in signalling circuits and reason for its use?
Q41: What do you mean by "Direct Feeding", "Local Feeding" and "Remote Feeding" of signals? Explain.
Q42: Describe the advantages of LED signal Lamps over conventional signal lamps.
Q43: What are the various PVC signal cables used in Railway signalling in SECR? Are
they screened one or not?
37 | P a g e
Q44: What do you mean by cable meggering? Please explain.
Q45: What is Electric Signal Reverser? List different types of Electric Signal Reversers
being used over Indian Railways.
Q46: What do you mean by EKT? Describe the working of EKT.
Q47: What do you mean by TS, TSS, FP, SP & SSP? Please explain.
Q48: What are the effects of RE in signalling?
Q49: List the names of various types of Block Instruments being used in stations on
Single/Double line and RE/Non-RE area. What special feature is incorporated in the
block instruments meant for use in RE area?
Q50: What do you mean by maximum length of parallelism in Railway Signalling over
RE area? Explain.
Q51: Why the repeater relays of track Relays are made Slow To Pick-up and with what
time delay and why? Explain.
Q52: What are the reasons behind using various traction bonds in Track Circuits over
RE area?
Q53: What arrangements/changes are required to be carried out in the DC track circuits being used in RE area
w.r.t. Non-RE area?
Q54: What are the effects of RE in signalling circuits and how are they minimised?
Q55: List the various types of Route indicators used in Railway Signalling and which
type is being commonly used in Indian Railways?
Q56: What are the items which are being used to increase the length of a DC track
circuit in RE area? What are the maximum permissible length of track circuits in Single
and Double line section on RE area?
Q57: What are the maximum permissible distances for direct feeding of signals on
Single and Double line section in RE area?
Q58: What are the various means of suppressing the value of induced voltages at the
source of 25 kV traction? Explain.
Q59: Draw a sketch showing the arrangement of power supply, neutral section feeding post, sectioning &
sub sectioning posts.
Q60: Draw and explain the State Transition diagram for the working of Axle Counter.
Q61: What are the different constituent parts of an axle counter?
Q62: What is Trolley Suppression Track circuit? Why is it necessary in Axle counter?
Q63: What are approach locking, back locking and dead approach locking in electrical
38 | P a g e
signalling? Explain with suitable examples using sketches.
Q64: What do you mean by Sectional route release in electrical signalling? Explain with suitable example
using sketches.
Q65: What is Crank Handle Interlocking in Railway signalling? Explain with suitable
example using sketch.
Q66: What is LC Gate Interlocking in Railway signalling? Explain with suitable examples using sketches.
Q67: What is the working principle of 24V battery charger used in Railway signalling?
Explain with sketch.
Q68: What do you mean by Filters in electrical rectifier circuits? What is the difference
between the chargers being used in signalling and telecommunication applications?
Q69: What is IPS? Describe in detail. How many battery banks are used in IPS in
Railway signalling?
Q70: What is electrical transformer? Explain its working in detail.
Q71: Mention the major advantages of the SMPS over Thyristor controlled Power
supplies.
Q72: What is an Inverter and where is this being used in Railway Signalling?
Q73: Calculate the total load in a typical 4 line way side station with one siding line and a common loop in a
Double line section. Draw necessary sketches.
Q74: In a PI installation, which circuit ensures the "One Signal-One Train" feature?
Please mentioned the name of this circuit and explain with suitable example.
Q75: Explain the signal control circuit for a home signal with one route with suitable
sketch and circuits.
Q76: List the name of activities pertaining to signal department which require prior
sanction of CRS for their execution in the yards.
Q77: What is the validity period of CRS sanction? Explain the process for obtaining
CRS's sanction.
Q78: What do you mean by ground connections?

Q79: What is the role of Drawing Office in S&T department?
Q80 What are the equipments to be provided with a Trolley/Lorry/Motor Trolley?
Q81 What is IB signal? Why this signal is provided? Is it being provided on single line
section? Explain the working of an IB signal.
Q82 What is the procedure to pass an IBS signal at its ON aspect by the driver of any
train?
Q83: What is half notch? Why is this provided and in which equipment/instrument?
39 | P a g e
Q84 Draw the Block Clearance circuit for SGE Double line instrument using appropriate
circuits.
Q85 What are the principles of Lock and Block working? How these are achieved in
SGE Double Line Block Instrument?
Q86 In Siemens signal group relays, the GLSR relay is made slow to release. Why?
Please explain.
Q87 What are the items to be checked during scrutiny of Engineering Scale Plan?
Q88 What items will you check during inspection of a motor operated point?
Q89 What items will you check during inspection of SSDAC?
Q90 What item are being noted during day/night footplate?
Q91 What items are being noted during joint point and crossing inspection with SE/SSE (P-Way)?
Q92 Draw the ALSR CKT for signal number S- ?
Q93 How will you councell your staff to prevent short cut method?
Q94 Why Disconnection Memo should be issued before attending to maintenance of

certain signal gears & for which activities/works, it should it be issued?
Q95 (a) What is the propose of using the choke in single rail DC track circuits in RE
area?
Q95 (b) What is half notch? Why is this provided and in which equipment/instrument?
Q96 Draw the complete diagram of Single Rail DC track circuit in RE area including
value of cack component?
Q97 What parameters are being checked during inspection of Analog Axle Counter and
what are their standard values?
Q98 (a) What are the conditions for granting line clear in double line B class station on
MACLS territory?
Q98 (b) What are the conditions for granting line clear in single line B class station on
Two Aspect CLS territory?
99. Draw the dog chart of following: - 2X3W5R
100. For the given yard draw the RCC for the following signals: -
Down Home Signal (S-1), Shunt Signal (Sh- 26), Starter Signal (S-4) and Calling
On signal (Co-2).
FOR SELECTION FROM JE/I/Tele to SE/Tele MW
1. What is Radio Patch? Describe it with the help of a Suitable diagram to patch control
40 | P a g e
circuit, in case of need.
2. Explain phase lock loop system with suitable diagram.
3. How rainfall attenuation is measured in MW communication.
4. What are the advantages of digital MW communication in comparison with the analog
MW?
5. Write one method of finding the modulation index.
6. Discuss different methods for avoiding the fading in MW communication.
7. Discuss the salient features of DTL-MUX equipment.
8. Draw a block diagram of Transreceiver radio equipment of Digital radio MW.
9. What is the testing carried out before taking over the charge of digital MW system?
10. Draw the block diagram for Radio Equipment?
7D6 & 7D15
11. Explain the function of 7D6 & 7D15 Radio Equipment?
12. What is fading? What are the counter measures Railways adopt to present?
13. What is DTL MUX? Explain it with diagram?
14. What is the meaning of video in & video-out signal-in Radio equipment?
15. How many types of measuring instrument are used in MW circuit? Write short
notes on each?
16. Write the short notes to explain the following?
· Channel Modem Card.
· VFT card.
· Design & set up the MW Communication in between two MW station and
two telephone exchanges in Railways?
CONTROL
1. Draw a neat sketch of a six pin socket wiring practiced in RE area and indicates the
advantage in it.
2. Explain in detail DTMF Signaling and its advantages?
3. Why two tones are transmitted at a time in DTMF signaling? What are it's advantages?
4. What are the types of traffic train control being used in Railways? Explain each of them?
5. What is total interruption of control? What is the work procedure at stations in such
situations?
RE & 6 Quad CABLE
1. What is meant by Loading in RE Cable?

2. What is meant by BON? Why and where it is used in RE Cable?
3. What is meant by Half Loading Section?
4. What is meant by Screening Factor in an underground telecommunications cable?
5. Write down types of Telecom Cable used in Railway for different communication
system.
6. Discuss benefits of replacement of O/H alignment by 6Q cable.
7. Write jointing procedure of 50 pair PIJF cable.
EXCHANGE
1. What is meant by Pulse Code modulation?

2. Give the working principle of Digital Exchange & its features.
3. Describe the properties of earthing used in Telecom with specific values used for
resistances, wire diameter, in each case.
4. Explain the working of SPC Exchange in brief with block diagram.
5. Describe PCM-TDM with appropriate diagram where it is used.
6. What are the functions of Line cards?
7. Explain Call processing in Electronic Exchange.
8. Write different types of tones with frequency and ÒN' and ÒFF' time duration for each
case.
41 | P a g e
9. What is "hunt group"? Explain the requirement of hunt groups.
10. What is DID and DOD. Explain advantages of these.
11. Write down the maintenance & protection of electronics exchange? How it is better than
strongers?
12. Advantage of Digital Exchange over analog Exchange?
13. Write 10 of features of electronic exchange. Which you would like to have in your
exchange?
14. Draw the basic structure of ISDN Exchange? What are the advantages & procedure's of
it's working.
15. Explain the structure of 2mbps bit stream with frame & multiframe?
16. Explain Bit-interleaving and Byte-interleaving?
17. Write down procedure to augmentation of electronic exchange up to 5000 Lines along
with justification. Prepare the brief estimate also.
18. How we can add two exchanges with 2MB connectivity? What will be its
advantages.
19. Discuss and explain difference between IP exchange and SPC exchange.
20. Discussed feature of ISDN with block diagram?
OFC
1. Explain the function of an OLTE in Optic-Fiber-System?

2. What are the advantages of Optic fiber cable over the conventional cable system?
3. How STM is more useful in SDH system over PDH system.
4. How monomode fiber is advantageous for communication network rather than
multichrome.
5. How dispersion is reduced in graded index fiber.
6. Discuss the merits & demerits of SDH?
7. What may be the reasons of alarm in OFC communication system?
8. Discuss the difference between PDH & SDH system? Also advantages of SDH over PDH
system.
9. Explain different network Topologies & basic, requirement of topologies?
10. Write down in what ways transmission & reception occurs in OFC. How OFC can
be optimum utilized in Indian Railways. How we can expand uses of OFC in
Commercial ways.
11. What are test conducted in OFC?
12. How we can patch from OFC to conventional cable?
13. What is RDSO specification of OFC Cable.
14. Detail the works of Railtel? How this body is advantageous for Railways.
RAILNET
1. What is LAN? What is the difference between internet & intranet, and which can be
categorized under LAN?
2. What do you meaning of LAN, WAN, MAN & VLAN?
3. What is the function of Router?
4. How networking in our Railway has been done? Discuss its benefits & procedures for
Internet Connectivity.
5. Discuss different network topologies? Give explanation diagram for each?
6. How to connect 10 nodes (PC) in network. Explain with diagrams, detailing equipments
needed.
7. Explain different network Topologies. Also explain requirement of individual topologies
with diagrams?
8. What is Router? What types of ports are available in Router?
9. Explain the functions of switch? Also detail the advantages of switch over HUB?
10. What is VPN? How it will be useful in a corporate network?
11. What is Layer 3 switch?
42 | P a g e
12. What is synchronous & asynchronous communication?
13. What is the use of NMS to monitor and control the problems in Railnet?
14. Detail the differences between OSI & ISO layer?
15. Differentiate between L-3 switch and Router?
16. Difference between Hub and switch with diagrams?
17. What do you mean by NMS?
18. What is the permissible length between switch to switch via CAT-5/6 cable?
19. What is TCP/IP and UDP?
20. Why OFC cable is used in LAN? What are it's advantages?
21. Give details of AFRES, MMIS, and PRIME?
22. Why VLAN used? What are the advantages of VLAN configuration over the
normal configuration?
23. Give full form of SNMP. Detail its basics and why it is used?
24. What is the meaning of MAC ?
25. What is IP address? Also give details of four sections of it.
26. Explain OSI seven layer model?
27. What is synchronous and asynchronous communication?
28. What type of mail server is being used in our Railway?
29. What are the minimum number of ports in a Router?
30. What theory used in LAN, is it Multicast, Unicast or Broadcast?
31. What is RAS and what are it's functions??
32. What is proxy server? Why Proxy server is being used in SEC Railway?
33. What do you mean by MPLS? Where it is used?
34. For testing one Hop distance which command are used?
35. How many types of modem are used for network? Specify for permanent &
dialup types?
36. What do you mean about Firewall?
37. Why NetBIOS protocols are used?
38. In Railway which type of architecture are used for MIS?
39. List the differences between ROM & RAM?
40. What Operating and application software are used in client and server side in
Railways for MIS application?
41. What do you mean by UTP CAT5/6 cables?
42. What is Hop distance?
43. For route checking which command are used in command mode?
44. What do you mean about IDS, IPS in security?
45. Which technology used for wireless data communication between two PCs. or
Mobile to PC?
46. Bandwidth for STM-1 & E-2 steam?
47. MAC address is which Layer address in OSI Layer?
48. What are the terms indicated by subnet mask ?
49. Give an example of IP address, subnet mask and gateway of router with simple
example?
50. Draw a block diagram of SECR Railnet with all network devices and servers and
explain each network devices in brief. (Including R & NGP)
51. Give short notes on:
· VOIP
· URL
· NIC
· CSMA/CD
· Frame
· Packet
FOIS
1. How do we connect FOIS network between two stations. Explain with block
diagram.
2. What are the advantages we are getting from FOIS? Explain fourth point of public
43 | P a g e
& Railways.
3. Explain with block diagram the connectivity of FOIS between Divisions to HQ in SECR.
PASSENGER AMENETIES
1. Discuss how Touch & Feel system works in Railway. What are items included in it?
2. Discuss unification of PRS & UTS. What are the advantages of it?
3. Discuss how IVRS, video conferencing, Call Centre, Train Charting/Voice Recorder
works.
4. Draw a block diagram of PRS at a way side station?
5. Write down the working principle of Coach Guidance System and Train
indication board?
Interaction with other public agencies
Give short notes on:

(i) SACFA
(ii) PTCC
(iii) WPC
Write short notes: -
a. Wave Guide
b. Space Diversity
c. Fade Margins
d. Frequency Diversity
e. Railnet
f. FOIS
g. OTDR
h. NTES
i. IVRS
j. DTMF Signaling
k. ISDN
l. LAN
m. WAN
n. FOIS
o. MODEM
p. LAN Extender
q. Router
r. Voice Data Logger
s. NMS
t. PRC
u. CCB Telephone
v. Q signaling
w. Jitter & Wander
x. PDH
y. SDH
z. Leased line
aa. BRI
bb. PRI
cc. TDM
dd. PCM
ee. CUG scheme
Objective type questions
(i) Write full forms of the following
i. CEPT card
ii. ISDN
44 | P a g e
iii. SMPS
iv. MTBF
v. OTDR
vi. SCADA
vii. ACSR
viii. OLTE
ix. MODEM
x. NMS
xi. UTS
xii. PIJP
xiii. DTMF
xiv. BON
xv. GSM
xvi. CRIS
xvii. FOIS
xviii. SPC
xix. DTMS
xx. COIS
xxi. AMI
xxii. HDB-3
xxiii. TDM
xxiv. RMS
xxv. STM
xxvi. LAN
xxvii. WAN
xxviii. PCM
xxix. GRIM
xxx. CUG
xxxi. TDM
xxxii. NMS
(ii) Write True/False of the following:-
1. In OFC Cable Repeater, Index of Core is kept higher than clad. (For
Total Internal Reflection) (T/F)
2. OTDR can be used to measure the Splice loss also in OFC-(T/F)
3. Inmarset works via satellite and any access to Private Network is not required- (T/F)
4. In (PRS+UTS) unified system UTS counter can issue a Reserved Ticket- (T/F).
5. For Radio Patching working of CNL cuts. It is necessary to convert 4W.CKT into 2W
before patching.- (T/F).
6. With MLLN of CNL cuts, it is necessary to convert 4W CKT into 2W before patching-
(T/F).
7. In DTMF dialing always two different frequencies are transmitted (T/F).
8. 1 Watt is equal to 30 dbm. (T/F)
9. 672 MB are provided in STM-I (T/F)
10. OTDR is used in Digital MW. (T/F).
11. WAN can be provided in closed premises. (T/F).
12. In TDM, the transmission of signal is on time sharing basis. (T/F)
13. In SPC Exchange, the switching network set up temporary connection between two are
more exchanges. (T/F)
14. LAN Extender can be used for WAN connectivity (T/F).
15. Specification of OFC Cable is IRSTC-55(T/F).
(iii) Fill in the blanks.
1. The duration of a multiframe is ...........

2. In a 30 channel system, the sampling time period is.............
45 | P a g e
3. In 30 cahnnel PCM system, a time slot duration is ............. microsecond.
4. STM 4 is having -----------2Mb
5. In data circuit, Data transfer limit in CAT-6 cable is ---------
6. Channel transmission capacity of STM-1 is --------------
7. Bit rate of 2Mb with --------------------- PPM tolerance.
8. Bit rate of 2nd order mux ----------------- Kbps ---------------- PPM tolerance.
9. Duration of frame -------------------
10. Duration of Time slot -------------------
11. What does EPABX stand for ----------------------------------
12. Analog Subscriber loop resistance ------------------------ Ohm.
13. Working voltage of electronic exchange ----------------- V ----------------- tolerance.
14. Ideal working Temperature of exchange ---------------------
15. Dial tone ------------------ Hz modulated with ----------------- Hz frequency.
16. Ring back tone ------------------ Hz modulated with ------------------ Hz frequency.
17. Busy tone ------------------- Hz modulated with --------------- Hz frequency.
18. Switch is a ------------------ device (Broadcasting/Unicasting).
19. Switch function on the principle of ------------------ (CSMA/CDMA).
20. Insertion loss of Telephone equipment in the case of: -
· Handset is on the -----/switch/Nil
· Handset is off the -----/switch/0.2db
· Press to -------"button pressed/3.0db
QUESTION BANK FOR THE SELECTION OF JE-I(SIGNAL) TO

SE(SIGNAL)
(Objective/True-False and short Questions)
1 Operating Current of coil of indicator in DLBI is about:-

i) 40 50 mA ii) 95-100mA
iii) 17-25 mA iv) 37-42 mA
2 Rated current and coil resistance of a polarized relay is:-

i) 100 mA & 100 Ohm ii) 33 mA & 25 Ohm
iii) 25 mA & 77 Ohm iv) 125 mA & 77 Ohm
3 L-Type of transformers are used:-

i) Where Signals lamps are directly fed up to 605 Mtr.
ii) Where LED Signals lamps are used.
iii) Where Signals lamps are directly fed up to 240 Mtr
iv) Where Signals lamps are directly fed beyond 1000 Mtr
4 Rating of SL-35B triple pole lamps is :-

i) 12 V/24W,24W ii) 12V/24W,18W
iii) 24 V/24W,24W iv) 24V/12W,12W
5 The No. of front and back contacts in QTA2 relay is:-

i) 1F/1B ii) 2F/1B
iii) 1F/2B iv) 2F/2B
6 Minimum permissible TSR with concrete sleeper track

circuits in RE area is:-
i) 2.5/KM ii) 0.6 /KM
iii) 0.25/KM iv) 0.5 /K
7 QS3 DC neutral Relays are used in :-

i) All circuits of non RE section
ii) Only internal circuits of RE area
iii) In axle counter in place of self type relay
46 | P a g e
iv) Point machine controlling RE area
8 QJ1 DC neutral Relays are used in :-

i) All circuits of non RE section
ii) For timing control
iii) In axle counter in place of self type relay
iv) Point machine controlling RE area
9 Lamp proving relays are :-
i) Current sensing DC line relays

ii) Voltage sensing DC line relays
iii) Current sensing DC track relays
iv) Voltage sensing DC track relays
10 Rated Voltage and Power of an AC LED signal is :-

i) 230V, 15W ii) 110V, 50W
iii) 110 V, 15W iv) 230V, 50W
11 In DLBI Commutator handle gets locked when it is turned :-

i) From Line Close to Line Clear
ii) From Line Clear to Line Closed
iii) From Line Closed to train on Line
iv) Line Clear to Train on Line
12 ALSR Relay is used for :-

i) Sequential route release ii) Sectional Route release
iii) Route Locking iv) Dead approach locking
13 EUYNR is: -
i) Emergency route cancellation relay
ii) Emergency group signal cancellation Relay
iii) Emergency route cancellation button relay
iv) 120 second time delay relay
14 Commissioner of Railway Safety (CRS) belongs to the

ministry
of:-
i) Railways ii) Civil Aviation
iii) Surface Transportation iv) Labour
15 Refresher course of signal supervisors is required once in:-

i) 3 Year s ii) 5 Years
iii) 4 Years iv) 6 Years
16 Number of aspects in the Inner Distant signal of an IBS

signal in Double Distant signalling territory is:-
i) 3 ii) 2
iii) 4 iv) Same as those of its Distant Signal
17 Longitudinal bonding is provided by:

i) Engineering Department
ii) Electrical department
iii) S&T department
iv) Combined with ii &iii
18 Induced voltage in unscreened cable for double line is
47 | P a g e
i) 116 V/Km
ii) 95 V/Km
iii) 87.5 V/Km.
iv) 78.5V/Km
19 Maximum length of direct feeding for screened and
unscreened cables respectively is
i) 890 m and 980 m
ii) 345m and 543m
iii) 600m and 240m
iv) 640m and 200m
20 IRS type high thrust point machine can operate safely with
maximum contact test load of.....kg on the throw bar
i) 670
ii) 700
iii) 730
iv) 760
21 Stroke of IRS type point machine is

i) 143 mm
ii) 220 mm
iii) Both i and ii
iv) Stroke can be adjusted between 110 mm to 220 mm
22 No. of throw rod, detection rod and lock rod in IRS type
point machine are
i) 1, 2 and 2
ii) 2,1 and 2
iii) 2, 2 and 1
iv) 2,2 and 2
23 Study the following statement about testing of Glued Joints

A) In dry condition resistance of glued joint shall be less than 25
Mega ohm when meggering voltage of 100 V DC is applied
across the joint
B) In wet condition resistance of glued joint shall not be less than3
Kilo ohm when meggering voltage of 100 V DC is applied across
the joint.
Which of these statements are true?

i) Both A & B
ii) Only A
iii) Only B
iv) None of A & B
24 Study the following statement

A) For track Circuits lengths up to 700 m, Maximum permissible rail
resistance is 2 Ohm/Km
B) For track Circuits lengths more 700 m, Maximum permissible rail
resistance is 0.5 Ohm/Km.
Which of these statements are true
i) Both A & B
ii) Only A
iii) Only B
iv) None of A & B
25 Study the following
48 | P a g e
A) Rail resistance = (Voltage Drop in Rails)/ Average track circuit
current
B) Ballast Resistance = (Average rail Voltage)/Leakage Current
Which of these statements are correct?
i) Both A & B
ii) Only A
iii) Only B
iv) None of A & B

A) For safe working of track Circuits, without a shunt across the
track, track relay excitation shall not exceed 250% of its pick up
valve.
B) With normal feed source voltage and minimum permissible
ballast resistance of the track, Track relay voltage shall be less than
125 % of its pick up valve.
Which of these statements are true?
i) Both A & B
ii) Only A
Only B
iii)
iv) None of A & B

A) In DLBI block bell has separate line wire.
B) In DLBI Top indicator needle of station in advance is connected
to bottom indicator needle of station sending train.
Both A & B are correct
i)
ii) Only A is correct
iii) Only B is correct
iv) None of A & B are incorrect

A) In DLBI, Commutator handle should locked first before the
"Train on line" indication appears on the indication when the handle
is turned from "Line Clear" to "Train on line" position.
B) If turning of Commutator is done quickly, a situation may arise
when TOL contacts are made but the Commutator is not locked in
TOL position.
i) Both A & B are correct and B is correct explanation of A.
ii) Both A & B are correct and B is not correct explanation of A
iii) Only A is correct.
iv) Only B is correct.

A) A transverse Rail Bond is provided connecting all the non-
insulated rails.
B) This provides continuous return path to traction current.

49 | P a g e
Transverse Bond is provided by ......... department and identification
of non-insulated rail is done by..........department.
i) S&T, Electrical
ii) S&T, S&T
iii) Electrical, S&T
iv) Electrical, Electrical

A) In double cutting arrangement, proving of control contacts is
done on either limb of HR coil.
B) This prevents false energisation of HR from multiple faults.
50 | P a g e
32 EI & PI are provided for stations having no. of routes..... and

...... respectively.
0-25, 25-200
i)
ii) 70-100, 20-35
iii) 50-200, 0-50
5-100, 100-200
iv)
33 Track crossings of signalling cables are done at a depth of
1meter below ..........
Ballast Level
i)
Top Level of Rail
ii)
Bottom Level of Sleeper
iii)
Bottom Level of Rail
iv)
34. M/s CEL is one of the manufacturers for:

a. Analog Axle Counters only
b. Integrated Power Supply
c. Electronic Interlocking Equipment
d. Both Analog and Digital Axle Counters
35. For Mechanical Signal Items, who does the inspection of

materials?
a. RDSO
b. RITES
c. Consignee
d. None of the above.
36. The "Outlying Siding" is referred to the siding for which:

a. The siding line takes off from running lines and the siding
is located out side of that station.
b. The siding line takes off from running lines and is located
in side of that station.
c. The siding line takes off from running lines and located
between block stations.
d. An additional line is provided for this purpose in any
station.
37. CRS's sanction is not required for the following work in

the existing yard?
a. Replacing mechanical operation of a point with motor
operation
b. Inserting a turnout on passenger running line
c. Shifting of a signal from LHS to RHS.
d. Opening of a new line for public
38. The following is wrong with respect to track repeater

relay (TPR)?
a. It has 12 Front /4 Back contacts
b. It is of QNA1 type
c. It has got AC immunity against induced voltages
51 | P a g e
d. It is an example of track relay
39. The power supply Track Circuits are taken through which
of the following components/modules of the IPS?
a. Rectifier
b. DC-DC converter
c. Inverter
d. Transformer
40. Choose the correct option for Digital Axle Counters
presently being used in SEC Railway
a. It has both "Preparatory" and "Hard" Resetting options
b. It doesn't require trolley suppression track circuit
c. It can detect more than one section
d. It uses only Two conductors for establishing
communication between the pair of EJBs
41. Block Bell Equipment is used for

a. Converting AC line voltage coming from the Block
instrument at other end of station to required DC voltage
in local Block instrument
b. Converting high AC line voltage coming from the Block
instrument at other end of station to a required low AC
voltage in local Block instrument
c. Converting high DC line voltage coming from the Block

instrument at other end of station to a required low DC
voltage in local Block instrument
d. Converting DC line voltage coming from the Block
instrument at other end of station to required AC voltage
in local Block instrument
42. What is the approximate maximum distance for Direct

Feeding of conventional signal lamps on Double Line RE area?
a. 180 meters
b. 600 meters
c. 595 meters
d. 220 meters
43. Choose the correct answer from the following
a. The term "Block Forward" is concerned with the station
lying only in a Single Line section
b. The term "Block Back" is concerned with the station lying
only in a Single Line section
c. The term "Block Back" is concerned with the station lying
either in a Single Line section or a Double Line section
d. The term "Block Back" is concerned with the station lying
only in a Double Line section
44. The signal overlap for IBS signal is

a. 120 meters
b. 180 meters
c. 200 meters
d. 400 meters
45. The Outer and Warner signals in LQ signalling territory

are examples of
a. A permissive and stop signals respectively
52 | P a g e
b. A stop and permissive signals respectively
c. A subsidiary and main signals respectively
d. Both are subsidiary signals
46. What is the normal aspect of main signals in Automatic

Signalling territory?
a. Yellow
b. Red
c. Green
d. Double Yellow
47. As per the latest policy of Railway Board, Level Crossing
Gate can be interlocked if the TVU of the LC gate is
a. Up to 20,000
b. Below 25,000
c. Between 15,000 to 20,000
d. More than 25,000
48. Which is correct with respect to VCOR in signalling

installations?
a. This is a special type of relay used in Digital Axle Counter
b. This is a special type of relay used to control rectifier
output of an IPS
c. This is a special type of relay used in Electronic
Interlocking
d. This is a special type of relay used in Siemens RRI
49. The working of an electrical transformer is based on

a. Mutual Inductance
b. Self Inductance
c. Hall Effect
d. Self Conductance
50 Circuit wiring in PI installations over SECR is being done with

a. 0.6 mm tinned wire
b. 1.0 mm tinned wire
c. 16/0.2 multi strand copper wire
d. 1.5 Sq. mm copper wire
51 Fill in the blanks:-
i) For Roding, running under the track the minimum distance

between top of Roding and bottom of rail should be....
ii) Minimum length of the lock bar for a broad gauge is........
iii) Lock bar should have minimum no. of Clips.......
iv) The colour of point lever is ........
v) Resumption of normal working after overhauling can be done
by SSE / Signal if no. of lever are not more than ........
vi) All gates within station limit are called ...gates.
vii) A gate qualifies for interlocking if the TVU are more than........
viii) Clearance between road surface and LC boom should be
between ......to...... Meter.
ix) Far boom locking to be effective it shall not be possible to lift
the boom by .....From close position.
x) Minimum of. ........ % of spare conductors are to be provided
in the main cable up to farthest point zone.
xi) Station section in a "C' class station is from ......to .........
xii) Specification of self regulatory battery charger is S.........
53 | P a g e
xiii) A concrete sleeper is used in track circuited area if it has a
minimum resistance of ....Ohms between insert to insert.
xiv) Minimum cross section of lead wire for track circuit should be
.......mm.
xv) Excitation level of a track relay will not be less than .......of
rated pick up voltage.
xvi) Plug in type of track relays has to replace after .......years.
xvii) The overhauling period of DLBI is ..........years.
xviii) For obstruction test of a point test piece is kept at a .........
distance from the tow of
xix) Fuse of correct capacity should be of about ......time the rated
current in signaling circuit.
xx) The minimum implantation distance of a colour light signal
from the centre of the track should be ...........
xxi) The colour of shunt signal button on the panel is ...........
xxii) Route setting on the panel is indicated by.......
xxiii) UYR relay is used for ..........
xxiv) WCR relay is used for.............
xxv) ALSR is used for ..........
xxvi) The value of induced voltage in unscreened cable in double
line section is ........ohm/Km.
xxvii) The AC immunity of a IRS point machine is.......Ohm.
xxviii) As per SEM the minimum visibility of a distance signal in
MACLS territory is........
xxix) The Block Section Limit Board is located at minimum .....metre
from home signal.
xxx) Clamp type direct locks are desirable for speed above.........
Km/Hour.
52. Write full form of :-
(i) SPAD
(ii) CCRS
(iii) RAMS
(iv) ECTS
(v) CTC
(vi) SSDAC
(vii) MSDAC
(viii) EKT
(ix) REB
(x) TLJB
(xi) MACLS
(xii) OLWR
(xiii) DMTR
(xiv) MTTR
(xv) MTBF
53. Write true or false:-
i) Insulated rail shall be kept clear of the ballast by 25mm.

ii) Only single rail track circuit can be provided in 25 KV Ac area.
iii) Rail joint bonds are maintained by S&T department.
iv) Audio frequency track circuit does not require glued joints.
v) Diodo token less block instrument cannot be used in RE area.
vi) 3-Phase point machine is immune to induced voltage and can
be used to any length of parallelism.
vii) Direct feeding of AC LED signals is permitted up to 2 Kms.
viii) All external circuit requires cross protection arrangement.
54 | P a g e
ix) When SM key is out no operation can be done from the panel.
x) Calling- on signal button is of red colour with white dot.
xi) Implantation distance is painted in red colour on signal post if
distance is more than 2.36 metre.
xii) Shelf type line relays are overhauled on after every 15 year.
xiii) CRS approval is required for locating a signal on right side.
xiv) For solid rodding the minimum unsupported length is 1.8
metres.
xv) Green notice is issued by traffic department.
xvi) The type of turn out is specified in Interlocking plan.
xvii) Calling- on signal detects all the points in routes and overlap.
xviii) After two months of commissioniong responsibility of
maintaining Signalling gears in station lies on open line even
if station is not handed over to open line.
xix) Interlocking of a L. C. gates requires sanction of CRS.
xx) QSPA1 relay is used as repeater of TR.
xxi) Authority to proceed means authority to enter in block
section.
xxii) Station limit and station section means same thing.
xxiii) Class "D" stations are non interlocked.
xxiv) Double yellow aspect means caution.
xxv) A depended shunt signal has no ON aspect.
xxvi) In automatic signaling letter "A" in white on black circular disc
is provided.
xxvii) Absolute block system is most prevalent system of block
working.
xxviii) Driver can pass an Automatic signal in red without any
authority.
xxix) Caution board is provided at 400 metre away from speed
indicator board.
xxx) Grease/petroleum jelly can be provided on secondary battery
terminals to prevent corrosion.
xxxi) The LED ECR used in ON aspect can also be used for route
aspect.
xxxii) SL-21 signal lamps have two filaments of equal rating.
xxxiii) The maximum length of track circuit in RE area using PSC
sleeper is 350 metres.
xxxiv) Force drop arrangement is provided in EKT.
xxxv) Calling on signal is of lunar white colour.
55 | P a g e
Syllabus basic concept -S1
State true OR false
S.NO Question Write answer Key
1 Indications for caution aspect is proceed and be prepared to pass ( ) False

next stop signal at restricted speed.
2 OFF aspect of a Warner signal is attention. ( ) False
3 Normal aspect of distant signal in double distance territory is caution. ( ) False
4 Normal aspect of automatic stop signal is proceed. ( ) True
5 Name of aspect and indication of UQMA signal and MACL signal are ( ) False
not same.
6 UQ distant signal cannot combine with a stop signal. ( ) False
7 Combining of signal shall be done under approved special instruction. ( ) False
8 Simultaneous reception and despatch shall be done under special ( ) False

instructions.
9 Function of passenger and goods warning board is same. ( ) True
10 A Warner signal and a distant signal perform same function. ( ) False
11 Shunting can be performed in face of approaching train at class “A” ( ) False

station.
12 The block overlap and signal overlap in two aspect signaling and ( ) True
multi-aspect signaling is 180 Mts.
13 A Warner signal(semaphore) is permissive signal and provided with a ( ) False

“P” marker.
14 Passenger warning board shall be placed at distance of 1KMts in rear ( ) False

of first stop signal in a station with multi-aspect colour light signaling.
15 The block overlap in multi aspect signaling is more than L.Q. signal. ( ) False
16 When distant signal display green aspect then it indicates run though ( ) False
condition.
17 Shunt signal can be placed below first stop signal. ( ) False
18 Calling On signal can be placed on last stop signal. ( ) False
19 The signal overlap in two aspect signaling is 120 Mts. ( ) False
56 | P a g e
20 Goods warning board shall be placed at distance of 1.4 KMts in rear ( ) True
of first stop signal.
21 Warner signal at OFF indicate run through condition on Loop Line. ( ) False
22 On single line station signal overlap is reckoned form outer most ( ) True
point of station.
23 Location of shunting limit board & Last stop signal is same. ( ) True
24 Isolation is not required in standard III interlocking. ( ) False
25 Block section limit board shall be provided at class B station on ( ) False

double line where first point is a trailing point OR no point with lower
quadrant signalling.
26 Visibility of Warner signal shall be 1.2 KMts for speed more than 100 ( ) False
KMPH.
27 Lock detection is not required in revised standard II interlocking. ( ) False
28 If LC Gate is interlocked with advance starter then a G maker shall be ( ) False

provided below advance starter.
29 Visibility of a pre-warned signal 200 Mt. ( ) True
30 Shunting limit board shall be placed at a distance of signal overlap ( ) False

from outer most point on double line.
31 Block overlap class C station is 400 Mts always. ( ) True
32 Catch siding protect block section and slip siding protect station ( ) False
section.
33 If speed is more than 50 kmph then one goods line need not be ( ) False
isolated from other goods line.
34 Purpose of repeating and co-acting signal is same. ( ) False
35 More than one calling ON signal can be placed below a stop signal. ( ) False
36 A “P” maker shall be provided below UQ distant signal. ( )
37 First stop signal on signal line normally shall be placed at distance of ( ) True
signal overlap plus block overlap from outer most point.
38 A “C ” marker shall be provided below a Semaphore miniature calling ( ) False

ON signal.
39 Starter repeater and repeating signal are same signals. ( ) False
40 Simultaneous reception of trains is allowed under approved special ( ) False

instruction.
57 | P a g e
41 If speed is less than 50 KMPH, then isolation of a passenger line from ( ) True
other connecting passenger line is not required.
42 Under special instruction means approval from commissioner of ( ) False

railway safety.
Fill up the blanks with correct answers
1 The block overlaps and signal overlap in Multi aspect signal ( )

are _____________ & ____________ respectively.
a) 180 Mt b) 400 Mt c) 120 Mt d) 300 Mt
2 Semiautomatic signal is provided with ( ) b

a) ‘A’ marker b) illuminated ‘A’ marker c) ‘AG’ marker
d) ‘P’ marker
3 A shunt signal can be placed ( ) d

a) On post by it self b) below any stop signalc) Below
any stop signal other than first stop signal d) a &c
4 Shunting in the face of approaching train can be performed ( ) b

at --------------- station/stations
a) Class ‘A’ b) Class ‘B’ c) Class ‘c’ d) all a,b &c
5 Attention aspect (double yellow) indicates that---------------- ( ) c

a) Two next signal ahead at OFF b) one next signal ahead at
OFF c) Be prepared to pass next signal with restricted speed.
d) a &c
6 If distant signal in single distant territory display proceed ( ) c

aspect then it indicates-----------
a) Run through on main line b) Run through on loop line
c) Train is going to be received on Main line , d) all a,b
&c
7 Adequate distance in automatic block system on double line ( ) c

is ---------------------
a) 180 Mt b) 400 Mt c) 120 Mt d) 300 Mt
8 Isolation is required for station with -------------------of ( ) d

interlocking
58 | P a g e
a) Standard I b) standard II c) standard III d) b&c
9 Normal aspect of automatic signal is ----------------------- ( ) c

a) ON b) OFF c) proceed d) caution
10 The possible maximum numbers of aspect in LQ signal with ( ) d

combination of signal is/ are ---------
a) Stop b) proceed with caution c) proceed d)
all a,b,&c
11 A catch siding shall be provided if the gradient stepper than ( ) b

1:80 in near vicinity of station and falling --------------
a) Away from station b) Towards station c)
Towards block section d) all a,b &c
12 A slip siding shall be provided if the gradient stepper than ( ) a

1:100 in near vicinity of station and falling --------------
a) Away from station b) to words station
c) To words block section d) all a,b &c
14 If a semiautomatic stop signal is protecting LC gate as well ( ) d

as point then ----------- shall be provided on the post.
a) ‘A’ marker b) illuminated ‘A’ marker c) ‘AG’
marker d) b&c
15 When the shunt signal and calling on signal is provided ( ) a

below stop signal then sequenced from top is
---------------------------------- signal.
a) First calling on then shunt b) first shunt and then
calling on c) Not possible d) any of a, &b
16 Aspects in distant signal in double distant signal territory is/ ( ) b

are
a) Attention b) a &c c) proceed d)
caution
17 The passenger warning board shall be provided 1 Km in rear ( ) b

of ------------ signal.
a) Home b) first stop c) routed home d) nun of
above
18 The section Gate under absolute block system shall be ( ) a
59 | P a g e
provided with ------- marker.
a) ‘G’ b) ‘AG’ c) ‘PG’ d) ‘A’
19 If two automatic block section and overlap ahead of an ( ) a

automatic signal is clear of train then it will display
--------------- aspect
a) Attention b) a OR d c) stop d) caution
20 The block overlap in class ‘C’ station provided with colour ( )

light signal is---------
a) 180Mt b) 400Mt c) 120Mt d) 580Mts
21 Repeating signal is provided when ---------------- ( )

a) Signal is not continuous visible b) signal is not visible at
all c) Prescribed visibility of signal is not available d)
duplicate signal is to be provided.
22 If speed is less than 15 KMPH then ------------- type route ( )

indicator shall be provided.
a) Directional b) stencil c) multi lamp d) any one of three
Match the Following :
1. Signal overlap in LQ Signal (e ) a) 400Mt

2. Block overlap plus signal overlap in LQ Signal (d ) b) 300Mt
3. Signal overlap in automatic Signal (DL) (c ) c) 120Mt
4. Block overlap plus signal overlap in UQ Signal (b ) d) 580Mt
5. Block overlap in class ‘C’ station (a ) e) 180Mt
1. Sighting distance (e ) a) station limit

2. Block section limit board (d ) b) LQ signal station
3. Shunting limit board (c ) c) Class B station single line
4. Passenger warning board (b ) d) class B station MACLS double line
5. Distant signal (a ) e) goods warning board
1. Illuminated ‘A’ marker (e ) a) No ‘P’ marker

2. ‘G’ marker (d ) b) P marker
3. ‘AG’ marker (c ) c) LC Gate and point
4. Distant signal (b ) d) LC Gate in block section
5. Distant cum gate home signal (a ) e) LC Gate in automatic section
60 | P a g e
S 2. State true/false
s.n Question Write Key
o answer
1 Swinger/top piece can not be used in the first & last ( ) T
channels
2 Reverse swinger can not be used in the second ( ) T
channel
3 Normal swinger can not be used in the last but one ( ) T
channel
4 Swinger shall not be used in the adjacent channel on ( ) T
the same tappet
5 Fouling of notches can not be over looked ( ) T
6 The total nos.of bridle bars at any given place of a ( ) T
channel 2 top bridle bar +2 bottom bridle bar in catch
handle lever frame.

7 If the distance from the signal & 1st facing point or from ( ) T
one facing point to next facing point is more than 180
Mts. then one holding bar to be provided.
8 If the distance from the signal & 1st facing point or from ( ) T
one facing point to next facing point is more than 180
mtr then lock retaining bar to be provided
9 Dummy Lock need to be provided if an unconnected ( ) T
length of a bridle bar exceeds more than 10 levers.
10 Use of top pieces shall be a last alternative for avoiding ( ) T
fouling notches
11 Warner is not released by any one of the Home Signal ( ) T
12 Signaling plan is prepared based on Type of Signaling, ( ) T

the class of Station
13 Size of Catch handle type lever frame will be in ( ) T
combination or multiples of 8 and 10
14 “Direct” type lever frame size will be in combination or ( ) T
multiple of 5 and 7
15 Outer is released by any one of the Home Signal ( ) T
16 Width of the tappet is 41 mm in direct lever frame ( ) T
17 Width of the channel 40 mm in catch handle lever ( ) T
frame
18 Clearence between the two tappets is 59 mm in Catch ( )
handle lever frame
61 | P a g e
19 The lock dog should be riveted with the only one bridle ( )
bar
20 Length of swinger is 79 mm ( )
21 In SWCH type lever frame (SA1101/M) the pitch of the ( ) T
channel is 100 mm
22 In SWCH type lever frame (SA1101/M) the stroke of ( ) T
the tappet is 65 mm
23 Fouling of notches can be avoided by using top pieces ( ) T
24 The locking diagram is to be prepared based on ( ) T
approved locking table
25 The factor by which the route holding is achieved by ( ) T
interlocking between the successive lock bars
26 The factor by which the route holding is the distance ( ) T
from the signal and first facing point by limiting to 180
Mts.
27 The factor by which the route holding is achieved by ( ) T
the existence of lock bar
28 Size of bridle bar is 16 mm X 12 mm. ( ) T
29 Locking tray should be graphited periodically. ( ) T
30 Graphite should be mixed along with axle oil. ( ) T
31 Any swinger/top piece can not be used in the first and ( ) T
the last channels.
32 Reverse swinger can be used in the second channel ( ) F
33 Normal swinger can be used in the last but one ( ) F
channel.
34 Swinger always shall be used in the adjacent channel ( ) F
on the same tappet.
35 Fouling of notches can be over looked. ( ) F
36 The numbering of bridle bar at any given place of a ( ) F
channel may be more than four if required
37 Dummy Lock need not be provided if an unconnected ( ) F
length of a bridle bar to a distance of more than 10
levers
38 Use of top pieces shall not be a last alternative for ( ) F
avoiding fouling notches.
39 Warner is released by Outer & Main Line Home ( ) T
40 Outer is released by Adv. Starter ( ) F
41 Signal in advance locking the trailing points both ways ( ) T
is an arrangement of route holding.
42 The converse of locks normal is locks released by. ( ) F
43 Released by relation can also be expressed as locks ( ) F
both ways.
44 The lock retaining bar is used in centralized MAUQ ( ) F
62 | P a g e
signaling for holding the route.
45 Route lever is also a means of route holding. ( ) T
46 Conflicting points shall lock each other. ( ) T
47 A facing lock bar is released by another trailing lock bar ( ) F
in the route of a train, is called as successive lock bar
locking.
48 Route method is normally adopted to prepare a locking ( ) T
table.
49 An intermediate stanchion is required for a double wire ( ) T
LF having a capacity of more than 18 levers.
50 Loose and tight locking are a special feature of D.W. ( ) T
lever frame.
51 A swinger is required for a conditional locking. ( ) T
52 A swinger should be placed similar to condition on a ( ) T
conditional lever.
53 Number of bridle bars in a conditional locking is equal ( ) T
to number of swingers plus one
54 Testing of converse locking in locks normal is not ( ) T
necessary.
55 Spare levers are catered in the middle while numbering ( ) F
a layout with geographical cum group method of
numbering.
56 The signaling plan is prepared based on the ( ) T
engineering plan.
57 While deciding the size of the lever frame is in multiples ( ) T
of 8 and / or 10 in catch handle type lever frames.
58 Level crossing gate numbering is done at the end of all ( ) F

groups while numbering the yard with geographical-
cum-group method.
59 Principles of interlocking is applicable only for lower ( ) F
quadrant signaling and not for other types of signaling
60 Separate arrangements of route holding is not ( ) F

necessary as principles of interlocking is covering the
route holding.
61 Signals are released by level crossing gates in the ( ) T
route
62 By tripping of one lever if the other lever is not locked it ( ) T
is called as loose locking
63 The loose locking is used for flexibility in the yard. ( ) T
64 When the clutch lever trips in the normal position the ( )
locking plunger moves by 12 mm upwards
65 Slots lock each other directly having separate overlap. ( ) T
66 Additional arrangement of route holding is necessary ( ) T
63 | P a g e
when a signal is placed at a distance of greater than
180M from the point it controls.
67 Successive point locking is one of the arrangements of ( ) F
route holding.
68 In a central cabin operated double wire signalling yard, ( ) F
the route holding is achieved by clutch levers.
69 Normally geographical method is adopted for ( ) F
numbering the signals in a yard
70 Dummy dog to be used when the bridle bar is un ( ) F
supported for eight plungers
71 Any swinger should not used in the last channel. ( ) T
72 A signal is locking normal points if required in reverse ( ) F
73 While numbering a signaling yard normally group cum ( ) F
geographical method is not adopted.
74 An additional lock bar to be provided when the distance ( ) F
between the two successive lock bars is more than 500
Mts
75 More important point released by less important point ( ) F
76 Signals are released by the first point ( ) F
77 In a conditional locking when the swinger is placed on ( ) T
a locking lever it is always reverse swinger.
78 In a conditional locking number of swingers are equal ( ) F
to no. of locking levers
79 Shunt signal should lock slot in opposite direction ( )
through a condition having separate overlap
80 The trap point releases the lock bar. ( ) T
81 Outer Signal releases Home Signals ( ) F
82 Loop Home Signal releases Warner Signals ( ) F
83 Main line Home Signal Locks Loop lines slot having ( ) T
separate overlap.
84 A Running Signal released by shunt Signal below it (in ( ) F
same post).
85 A slot having separate overlap must not lock all others ( ) F
Slots
86 Width of tappet is 1980 mm ( ) F

87 Size or width of Channel is 65 mm in SWCH lever ( ) F
frame
88 Section of Bridle Bar is 16 mm X 12 mm ( ) T
89 Space between two Tappet is 346 mm in double wire ( ) F
64 | P a g e
lever frame
90 A Signal shall lock the point for isolation though it may ( ) T
not be in the route and negotiated by the train
91 Any swinger/top piece can be used in the first and the ( ) F
last channels.
92 Reverse swinger can be used in the second channel ( ) F
93 Normal swinger can be used in the last but one ( ) F

channel .
94 Swinger shall be used in the adjacent channel on the ( ) F
same tappet.
95 Fouling of notches may be over looked ( ) F
96 The numbering of bridle bar at any given place of a ( ) F

channel may exceed four in double wire lever frame.
97 Dummy Lock need to be provided if an unconnected ( ) F
length of a bridle bar to a distance of more than 12
levers
98 Use of top pieces need not be a last alternative for ( ) F
avoiding fouling notches.
99 Warner is released by Outer & Loop Line Home ( ) F
100 Outer is not released by Adv. Starter ( ) T
S3 QUESTION BANK
1. LEVER FRAMES:
s.no Question Write answer Key
1 Single Wire lever frame classified as ( ) B
(a) 3 types (b) 2 types (c) 4 types
2 Length of the direct lever (SA 530) is ( ) B
(a) 1455mm (b) 2275mm (c) 1980mm
3 Pitch of the Direct lever is ( ) B
(a) 100mm (b) 125mm (c) 150mm
4 Angular Through of the Direct lever is ( ) C
(a) 33 deg. (b) 52 deg. (c) 27 deg.
5 Stroke of the Tappet in Direct lever is ( ) A
(a) 346mm (b) 277mm (c) 65mm
6 Pitch of the Channel in Direct Lever (SA-530) ( ) A
frame
(a) 110mm (b) 70mm (c) 63.3mm
7 Width of the Channel in Direct Lever (SA-530) ( ) B
frame
65 | P a g e
(a) 55mm (b) 70mm (c) 40mm
8 Max.No.of interlocking Bar in Direct Lever (SA- ( ) A
530) frame
(a) Top=3, Bottom=3 (b) Top=3, Bottom=2
(c) Top=2, Bottom=2
9 Max.No.of channels in Direct Lever (SA-530) ( ) A
frame
(a) 5&8 (b) no limit (c) 2 &4
10 Bay in Direct Lever (SA-530) frame ( ) C
(a) 8 or 10 (b) 1,2,3,4,5, 6 (c) 5 or 7
11 Length of the Catch handle (SA 1101) is ( ) C
(a) 1455mm (b) 2275mm (c) 1980mm
12 Pitch of the Catch handle (SA 1101) ( ) C
(a) 150mm (b) 125mm (c) 100mm
13 Angular Through of the Catch handle (SA ( ) A
1101) is
(a) 33 deg. (b) 52 deg. (c) 27 deg.
14 Stroke of the Tappet in Catch handle (SA 1101) ( ) C
is
(a) 346mm (b) 277mm (c) 65mm
15 Pitch of the Channel in Catch handle (SA 1101) ( ) C
frame
(a) 110mm (b) 70mm (c) 55mm
16 Width of the Channel in Catch handle (SA 1101) ( ) C
frame
(a) 55mm (b) 70mm (c) 40mm
17 Max.No.of interlocking Bar in Catch handle (SA ( ) C
1101) frame
(c) Top=2, Bottom=2
18 Max.No.of channels in Catch handle (SA 1101) ( ) C
frame (a) 5&8 (b) 2&4 (c) no limit
19 Bay in Catch handle (SA 1101) frame ( ) A
(a) 8 or 10 (b) 1,2,3,4,5, 6 (c) 5 or 7
20 Length of the Ground lever ( ) A
(a) 1455mm (b) 2275mm (c) 1980mm
21 Pitch of the Ground lever ( ) C
(a) 150mm (b) 125mm (c) 100mm
22 Angular Through of the Ground lever ( ) B
(a) 33 deg. (b) 52 deg. (c) 27 deg.
23 Stroke of the Tappet in Ground lever ( ) B
(a) 346mm (b) 277mm (c) 65mm
24 Pitch of the Channel in Ground lever frame ( ) B
(a) 110mm (b) 63.3mm (c) 55mm
25 Width of the Channel in Ground lever frame ( ) A
(a) 55mm (b) 70mm (c) 40mm
26 Max.No.of interlocking Bar in Ground lever ( ) B
frame
66 | P a g e
(c) Top=2, Bottom=2
27 Max.No.of channels in Ground lever frame ( ) B
(a) 5&8 (b) 2&4 (c) no limit
28 Bay in Ground lever frame ( ) B
(a) 8 or 10 (b) 1,2,3,4,5, 6 (c) 5 or 7
29 To alter the stroke to the required magnitude ( ) B
(a) Relief Crank (b) Adjustable Crank
(c) Vertical Crank
30 It will convert vertical movement into horizontal ( ) C
movement.
(a) Accommodating Crank (b) Adjustable
Crank (c) Vertical Crank
2. CRANKS:
31 First crank used in a rod transmission ( ) C
(a) Accommodating Crank (b) Horizontal
Crank (c) Vertical Crank
32 Adjustable sleeve in Adjustable Crank can be ( ) B
shifted in steps of
(a) 10mm (b) 12mm (c) 15mm
33 Last crank used in rod transmission ( ) A
(a) Adjustable Crank (b) Horizontal Crank
(c) Vertical Crank
34 To adjust the required stroke ----- crank is used ( ) B
(a) Accommodating Crank (b)
Adjustable Crank (c) Vertical Crank
3. Rodding
:
35 Solid rod dia. ( ) B
(a) 25mm (b) 33mm (c) 55mm

36 Solid rod available in length ( ) A
(a) 18’ (b) 15’ (c) 17’
37 Solid rod weight ( ) A
(a) 4 lb/ft (b) 6 lb/ft (c) 2 lb/ft
38 The distance between two adjacent roller stands ( ) A
should not be more than ------in solid rodding
(a) 2.2M (b) 3.3M (c) 1.89M
39 The distance between two adjacent roller stands ( ) C
should not be more than ------in tubular rodding
(a) 2.2M (b) 3.3M (c) 1.85M
40 Trestles are supplied in ( ) A
(a) 2-way & 4-way (b) 3-way & 4-way (c)
1-way &3-way
41 Bottom rollers required for 2-way roller stand ( ) B
(a) 3 no. (b) 2 no. (c) 4 no.
42 Bottom rollers required for 4-way roller stand ( ) C
(a) 3 no. (b) 2 no. (c) 4 no.
67 | P a g e
43 Top rollers required for 2-way roller stand ( ) B
(a) 3 no. (b) 2 no. (c) 4 no.
44 Top rollers required for 4-way roller stand ( ) C
(a) 3 no. (b) 2 no. (c) 4 no.
45 Top roller pins required for 2-way roller stand ( ) B
(a) 3 no. (b) 2 no. (c) 4 no.
46 Top roller pins required for 4-way roller stand ( ) C
(a) 3 no. (b) 2 no. (c) 4 no.
47 Split pins required for 2-way roller stand ( ) A
(a) 3 no. (b) 6 no. (c) 5 no.
48 Split pins required for 4-way roller stand ( ) B
(a) 3 no. (b) 5 no. (c) 6 no.
4. ROD COMPENSATOR: ( )
49 Compensator need not be used for points operation( ) A
up to the length of
(a) 12M (b) 13M (c) 18.5M
50 Compensator need not be used for lock bar operation
( ) C
up to the length of
(a) 12M (b) 13M (c) 18.5M
51 In compensator Acute /Obtuse angle crank arm ( ) B
sizes are
(a) 375 x 235mm (b) 406 x 253mm (c) 300 x
225mm
52 In compensator link rod size is ( ) B
(a) 346mm (b) 275mm (c) 165mm
53 One compensator must be provided up the rod ( ) B
transmission
(a) 346M (b) 210M (c) 265M
5. FACING AND TRAILING
POINT LAYOUTS:
54 Facing point lock plunger length in In and Out ( ) C
type of locking without cross slide is
(a) 346mm (b) 755mm (c) 500mm
55 Facing point lock plunger length in In and Out ( ) B
type of locking with cross slide is
(a) 346mm (b) 755mm (c) 500mm
56 Facing point lock plunger length in straight ( ) B
through type of locking is
(a) 346mm (b) 755mm (c) 500mm
57 Facing point lock plunger thickness is ( ) A
(a) 20mm (b) 38mm (c) 50mm
58 Facing point lock plunger width in ( ) C
(a) 20mm (b) 38mm (c) 50mm
59 Facing point lock plunger width in straight ( ) B
(a) 20mm (b) 38mm (c) 50mm
60 Notch width in split stretcher bar in In and Out ( ) C
type of locking is
68 | P a g e
(a) 23mm (b) 38mm (c) 53mm
61 Notch depth in split stretcher bar in In and Out ( ) A
type of locking is
(a) 23mm (b) 41mm (c) 53mm
62 Notch width in split stretcher bar in straight ( ) A
(a) 41mm (b) 38mm (c) 53mm
63 Notch depth in split stretcher bar in straight ( ) A
through type type of locking is
(a) 23mm (b) 41mm (c) 53mm

64 ( ) A
The length of lock bar is
(a) 42 ft (b) 38ft (c) 53ft
65 Section of lock bar is ( ) A
(a) 50 x 50 x 6mm (b) 50 x 40 x 6mm
(c) 50 x 50 x 20mm
66 Inter distance between two lock bar clips shall ( ) B
not exceed
(a) 1040mm (b) 1220mm (c)
1250mm
67 Total lift of lock bar is ( ) C
(a) 35mm (b) 38mm (c) 44mm
SIGNAL &WIRE
TRANSIMMION:
68 The maximum spacing between the pulley ( ) B
stakes should not exceed.
a) 8M (b) 10M (c) 4M
69 The joints on the wire should be sufficiently ( ) A
clear of pulley stakes is about
a) 2M (b) 6M (c) 4M
LC Gates:
70 SPL –Class L.C.Gates can be provided if the ( ) C
TVU is more than
a) 30,000 (b) 25,000 (c) 50,000
71 A –Class L.C.Gates can be provided if the TVU ( ) A
is more than
a) 30,000 (b) 25,000 (c) 50,000
72 B –Class L.C.Gates can be provided if the TVU ( ) B
is more than
a) 30,000 (b) 25,000 (c) 50,000
73 Range of operation for lifting barrier type is ( ) C
a) 200M (b) 125M (c) 150M
74 The open position of the lifting barrier shall be ( ) C
with in ------------degrees from the horizontal
a) 80 to 90 (b) 75 to 85 (c) 80 to 85
75 The closed position of the lifting barrier shall be ( ) A
within ----------degrees from the horizontal.
69 | P a g e
a) 0 to 10 (b) -5 to +5 (c) 0 to 5
TRUE OR FALSE:
1. LEVER FRAMES:
( )
1 In Direct lever, Lever shoes are common and T
interchangeable
( )
2 For each standard, one baring cap is provided. T
( )
3 Direct lever frame is available in bays of 5 levers and 7 T
levers.
( )
4 Shaft collars are provided to maintain lever pitch in T
catch handle lever frame
( )
5 Front tails are available as different strokes. T
( )
6 In Direct lever Back tail is meant for carrying a 25kg T
weight for long distance signals.
( )
7 In Direct lever Quadrants are fixed on T-section T
quadrant supporting bars.
( )
8 Quadrants to hold the lever in Normal & Reverse T
positions.
( )
9 Quadrants to guide the lever during operation. T
( )
10 Quadrants to maintain the lever pitch. T
( )
11 Direct lever poses the problems of conflicting notches. T
( )
12 In Direct lever locking box to attend maintenance and T
70 | P a g e
to attend failure.
( )
13 Conflicting of notches are almost completely avoided T
( )
14 SA1101 is More mechanical advantages than SA530. T
( )
15 D.W. Levers can be inserted on catch handle type to T
facilitate Outer, Warner & LSS operations.
( )
16 The locking will start to actuate by pressing the catch T
handle in ‘N & R’
( )
17 Mechanical advantage in catch handle lever is 5.6 T
( )
18 Mechanical advantage in direct handle lever is 5.6 T
( )
19 Pressing releasing the catch handle in catch handle T
lever frame tappet will move 31mm
( )
20 Clearance between catch block bottom and quadrant T
is 3mm
( )
21 Quadrants are fixed on rectangular quadrant T
supporting bar in catch handle lever frame
( )
22 Interlocking bar having the size of 16 x 12 mm T
2. CRANKS:
( )
23 To divert the rod run up to 20° Relief crank is used T
( )
24 Crank arm length 300mm x 300mm (12” x 12”) T
( )
25 One of the arm is CURVED in Accommodating crank to T
facilitate connection & to accommodate cranks placed
adjacent to it.
( )
26 Accommodating crank used in Outside lead out T
( )
27 Accommodating crank 300mm x 300mm (12” x 12”) is used T
for lever pitch is 100mm(4”)
( )
28 Accommodating crank 350mm x 350mm (14” x 14”) is used T
for lever pitch is 125mm(4”)
( )
29 Accommodating crank arm sizes are 300mm x 300mm (12” T
x 12”) & 300mm x 400mm
71 | P a g e
( )
30 Changing the alignment of rodding run.i.e., 500mm or T
600mm Straight Arm Crank is used
( )
31 In adjustable crank both the arms are equal. T
( )
32 In adjustable crank length of the arms are 300mm x 450mm T
( )
33 Signal crank is fixed at the base of signal T
( )
34 Signal crank arm length are 225 mm x 300 mm T
( )
35 Rod Joints are used for connecting levers, crank, points,etc., T
( )
36 Flush Joint is used at vertical crank towards out side T
leadout.
( )
37 Screw Joint single end is used at lock plunger and lifting T
barried boom locking.
( )
38 Screw Joint double end used for balancing of stroke at throw T
rod of point and lock bar.
( )
39 Eye Joint is used at radial guide, signal arm and circuit T
controllers
( )
40 Wide Joint is used where two rod joints required at one T
place.
( )
41 Lug Eye joint is use where two functions are operated from T
one lever.
( )
42 Swan Neck & Goose Neck joints are used for point detection T
rods.
( )
43 With turning of buckle in point adjusting screw we can T
shortening or lengthening of rodding. ( T )
3. Rodding
:
( )
44 Tubular rod length is 33.5 to 34.5mm T
( )
45 Tubular rod available in length 18’ T
( )
46 Tubular weight is 2 lb/ft T
( )
47 The rodding is supported on bottom rollers T
72 | P a g e
A small roller (top roller) is provided above the rods to
prevent any undue distortion in vertical plane
( )
48 The height of the trestles is 38mm T
( )
49 Point rodding shall be solid and shall be in accordance with T
IRS Spec.no.S5
( )
50 Point rodding shall be straight before being laid. T
( )
51 With lever in the middle position joints and lug eyes must not T
be located less than 300mm from roller stand.
( )
52 Cranks and compensators should be so located in the main T
run that it leaves field side clear for additional rodding run.
( )
53 Cranks and compensators must not be fixed nearer a point T
rod roller than 900mm.
( )
54 When rodding running under tracks must be arranged to T
permit the standard spacing and packing of the sleepers.
( )
55 The top of the rodding should not be less than 25mm below T
the bottom of the rails.
( )
56 Whenever possible, the running of rods under rail joints T
should be avoided
( )
57 Where a series of crossings have to be made each group T
must not be less than two sleepers apart.
( )
58 Rodding under L.C.Gates should preferably be run through T
standard reinforced concrete channels having mild steel
cover plates at the road level.
( )
59 Where diversion in rodding run up to 20 degrees relief crank T
must be used.
( )
60 The top of roller standards adjacent to tracks shall not be T
fixed more than 64mm above rail level.
( )
61 The distance from the nearest rod to the center of the track T
shall not be less than 1905mm on BG lines.
( )
62 The distance from the nearest rod to the center of the track T
shall not be less than 1370mm on MG lines.
( )
63 Off-sets in the rodding should be limited 90mm T
( )
64 Minimum length of the off-set should not be less than twice T
73 | P a g e
the amount of the off-set.
( )
65 Where more than one off-set is necessary, a guide should T
be provided.
( )
66 Joints in the rod run should be laid flat. T
( )
67 Two bolts at joints preferable to provide one bolt with head T
on top and the other with head underneath.
( )
68 Welding of 35mm joints into rodding should be avoided. T
( )
69 It is a rod used for connecting an interlocking lever to a T
vertical crank.
( )
70 Down rod length is more than 2M must be supported by a T
guide or guides in order to prevent buckling.
( )
71 Vertical crank is used in inside lead out T
( )
72 Accommodating crank is used in out side lead out T
( )
4.ROD COMPENSATOR:
( )
73 The rod compensator is installed to compensate the linear T
motion of rods (solid/tubular) due to temperature changes.
( )
74 A reverse crank used as compensator up to 120M T
transmission.
( )
75 The length of crank arm i.e, 300 mm (12”) is capable to take T
of up the expansion/contraction of 60M (200 ft) of rodding
connected to it.
( )
76 This compensation range is limited to 22 ½° on either side of T
its means position as a safe margin.
( )
77 Compensator is able to convert pull motion into push and T
vice versa without alteration of stroke
( )
78 The initial setting of the crank arms should corresponds with T
prevailing temperature.
( )
79 The compensator should transmit working stroke unchanged T
although it
must reverse the direction.
( )
80 Where the normal crank is used the length of the shorter T
rod must be added to the length of the longer rod to find out
74 | P a g e
the total length of straight line/trans.
( )
81 Where the reverse crank is used the length of the shorter T
rod must be subtracted from the length of the longer rod.
( )
82 There is no compensator in single wire transmission. T
( )
83 Approximate linear expansion of rods 0.24” /100 Yds/10 F T
rise in temperature
( )
84 For crossover point one compensator should be provided T
between cabin and near end point and near end point to far
end point one more compensator should be provided
( )
85 In rodding transmission there will be (2) Neutral points one T
at lever and other at function.
( )
86 The compensator is to provide exactly at centre of the two T
neutral points.
( )
5. FACING AND TRAILING POINT
LAYOUTS:
( )
87 Points are said to be facing when a vehicle or a train moving T
over them can be diverted from one track to the other
( )
88 In loose heel switch the front bolts of the fish plate at heel T
joint are to be kept sufficiently loose to allow for the easy
movement of the switch.
( )
89 In fixed heel switch the force required for the operation of T
point is increased.
( )
90 In over ridding switches the tongue rail slides over the foot of T
the stock rail.
( )
91 The length of tongue rail in BG in 1:8 1/2 turnout is T
4722mm(Straight Switch)
( )
92 The length of tongue rail in BG in 1:8 1/2 turnout is 7620 T
mm (Curved switch)
( )
93 The length of tongue rail in BG in 1:12 turnout is 7620mm T
(Straight Switch)
( )
94 The length of tongue rail in BG in 1:12 turnout is 9020mm T
(Curved Switch)
75 | P a g e
( )
95 The length of tongue rail in BG in 1:16 turnout (90R) is T
11000mm (Curved Switch)
( )
96 The length of tongue rail in BG in 1:16 turnout (52Kg) is T
13000mm (Curved Switch)
( )
97 points in the two tonque rails to move in union the tonque T
rails are tied through structure bars
( )
98 Leading stretcher bar having the size on BG is 6’ x 3” x ½”. T
( )
99 Leading stretcher bar having the size on MG is 4’ x 2 1/2” x T
3/8”.
( )
100 Leading stretcher bar should be fixed on BG at a distance of T
13” from the toe of the switch rail.
( )
101 Leading stretcher bar should be fixed on MG at a distance of T
15” from the toe of the switch rail.
( )
102 Following stretcher bar having the size on MG is 2’9” x 2 T
1/2” x 3/8”
( )
103 Following stretcher bar having the size on BG is 4’8” x 3” x T
1/2”.
( )
104 The following stretcher bar should be fixed on BG at a T
distance of 55” from the toe of the switch rail.
( )
105 The following stretcher bar should be fixed on MG at a T
distance of 54” from the toe of the switch rail.
( )
106 In point zone the track should be correct level and T
alignment
( )
107 In loose heel switch they can be thrown both ways with ease T
and can be housed against the stock rail by hand and
remain there when the pressure is removed.
( )
108 In fixed heel switch T
they normally lie in the mid-position and flex equally in the
normal and reverse positions.
( )
109 Tongue rail is chipped/cracked over a small length T
aggregating to 200mm with in the distance of 1000mm from
its toe.
( )
110 The lock bar & the Plunger is provided to prevent the T
unlocking of points while the train is moving over it.
76 | P a g e
( )
111 Lock bar driving attachment to be fixed at 14” (350 mm) from T
the toe of lock bar.
( )
112 Three(3) lock bar stop are provided to ensure a fixed T
clearance below the rail level by 38 mm (1 ½ “)
( )
113 Each section of lock bar one stop to be provided. T
( )
114 When the lock bar is normal, the FPL plunger should be T
clear by 12mm (1/2”) from the split stretcher bar.
( )
115 The clearance between stretcher notches and lock plunger T
shall not be more than 1.5 mm
( )
116 Detector is necessary to provide to detect the position of T
points and locks.
( )
117 The function of Detector is to prove the correct normal or T
reverse setting and correct locking of the point.
( )
SIGNAL &WIRE TRANSIMMION:
( )
118 2-Aspect lower quadrant semaphore signals are generally T
worked by single wire transmission.
( )
119 Day aspect of signal is Arm position horizontal is ‘ON’ and T
45 to 60 degrees below horizontal is ‘OFF’ position.
( )
120 In Mechanical signals spectacle arm is connected to the T
down rod
( )
121 The counter weight balance lever itself is fitted below on the T
post at a min. distance of 4 feet from the fulcrum of
spectacle.
( )
122 A signal post consists of two tubes of section ‘140mm’ and T
‘168mm’ outer diameter having each thickness of ‘7-9mm’.
( )
123 In tubular signal post the maximum height being only T
’10.5M’.
( )
124 Where two or more lines diverge to the signals must be fixed T
on a bracket post.
( )
125 Dolls available in 4.9M,3.9M,2.9M,1.9M. T
( )
126 Ladder on the signal post fixed at ‘225mm’ from the top of T
the post.
( )
127 B-Type spectical is commonly used on the Indian railways T
77 | P a g e
( )
128 B-Type spectical is Much heavier than A-Type spectical T
( )
129 In counter weight balance lever 92mm hole is connected to T
shunt signal.
( )
130 In counter weight balance lever 118mm hole is connected to T
‘B’ type spectacle to get 90mm stroke for 45 degrees.
( )
131 In counter weight balance lever 154mm hole connected to T
‘A’ type spectacle to get 130mm stroke for 50 degrees.
( )
132 The lowest transmission wire should be about 150mm clear T
from the ground.
( )
133 For running wire under level crossings, trenches are made T
along the level crossings, the top being covered with mild
steel plates of suitable size and the inside surface of trench
being plastered with cement.
( )
134 Sometimes wire run under L.C. Gates are made through T
pipes provided in the level crossings.
( )
135 Facile stroke lever may be employed at a distance of 60 to T
80M from the signal.
( )
LC Gates:
( )
136 D –Class L.C.Gates provided for cattle crossing T
( )
137 L.C.Gate Census will be taken once in three years T
( )
138 Swing type gates are open either towards or away from the T
track.
( )
139 Mechanical lifting barrier type gates are operated by T
vertically
( )
140 The booms are provided according to the width of the road T
( )
141 Lifting barrier drum is connected by D.W. transmission with T
gear on the winch.
( )
142 The movement of the lock wheel in lifting barrier winch is T
made less than one complete revolution.
( )
143 ‘E’ type key can be extracted only when the gate is closed T
( )
144 A light fringe is usually fitted to provide a barrier between the T
boom and road surface , so that smaller animals of children
78 | P a g e
may not pass through.
( )
145 Lifting barrier boom height from road surface should be T
maintained between 0.8M and 1M.
( )
146 The boom shall be either painted with 300mm bands of T
alternate black and yellow color or provided with approved
type of retro-reflective strips.(
( )
147 It shall be ensured that Boom locking is effective and it is not T
possible to lift the boom by more than 10 degree from
closed position.
( )
148 Rope drum (fixed on pedestal) not inter changeable for T
assembly from RH to LH and vice-versa.
( )
149 Tunion Brackets not inter changeable for assembly from RH T
to LH and vice-versa.
( )
150 Link assembly for bell not inter changeable for assembly T
from RH to LH and vice-versa.
( )
151 Pedestal on winch rope drum is mounted not inter T
changeable for assembly from RH to LH and vice-versa.
( )
152 The approach road should be in level. T
( )
153 The gate equipments should be there as prescribed in the T
working rule
( )
154 The Whistle Board are provided on track while approaching T
L.C.Gate.
( )
155 The view for road users and the gateman of an approaching T
train is not obstructed.
( )
156 The telephone communication is in proper working order in T
gate lordge.
( )
157 The working instructions of the L.C.Gate is in the local T
language besides Hindi and English.
( )
158 At the time of taking cences Train, Motor vehicle, bullock T
carts&tongues taken as 1 unit
( )
159 At the time of taking cences Cycle rickshaw & auto rickshaw T
taken as ½ unit
( )
160 Visibility of manned gate is 5M. T
79 | P a g e
( )
161 Fencing parallel to the track in L.C.Gate to be provided both T
side of track on either side of road is 15M
( )
162 Gate lodge to be provided at 6M from center of track T
( )
163 Speed Breakers are provided at 20M from center of track on T
both sides
( )
164 Height gauge to be provided at 8M from center of track T
( )
165 Gate post be provided at 3M from center of track T
( )
166 TVU is more than 6000 or L.C.Gate visibility is poor –Un T
manned gate is converted into Manned gate.
E- TYPE LOCKS:
( )
167 Standard size of Key lock (E-type) –155X95X65mm T
( )
168 E-type Key locks used for interlocking different functions T
( )
169 E-type Key locks used for locking points T
( )
170 E-type Key locks used for locking boom locking levers T
( )
171 E-type Key locks used for locking levers T
( )
172 E-type Key locks used for block instruments locking T
( )
173 The stroke of the E-type lock is 25mm. T
( )
174 The no. of wards in the key is 3 T
( )
175 A small hole is provided on center stud for sealing purpose. T
( )
176 The function of the ward is to actuate the tumbler. T
( )
177 The function of Lug & Feather is to operate the operating T
piece and to prevent the insertion of wrong key .
( )
178 Key turned clockwise lock bolt goes inside and key is T
locked.
( )
179 Key turned anti clockwise lock bolt comes out and key is T
came out.
( )
180 Material used for the tumblers is brass. T
( )
181 Length of each key ward –6mm T
80 | P a g e
( )
182 Length of each lug & feather –18mm. T
( )
183 No.of locks available is 42 T
( )
184 No.of ward combination is 24 T
S4-Double wire signaling

State true/false
Chapter-2(Double Wire Levers)
1 Double wire levers can be replaced ( ) T
without disturbing other levers.
2 Double wire levers rotate through 1800, ( ) T
when operated from normal to reverse.
3 The stroke transmitted to the tappet is ( ) T

40mm when a lever is operated from
normal to reverse.
4 Locking tappet stroke of a clutch lever is ( ) T
12 mm upwards when tripped at Normal.
5 Locking tappet stroke of a clutch lever is ( ) T

12 mm downwards when tripped at
Reverse.
6 Locking tappet stroke of direct lever is 40 ( ) T
mm upwards while operating from Normal
to Reverse.
7 Locking tappet stroke of direct lever is 40 ( ) T

mm downwards while operating from
Reverse to Normal.
8 Locking tappet stroke of clutch lever is 40 ( ) T

mm upwards while operating from Normal
to Reverse.
9 Locking tappet stroke of clutch lever is 40 ( ) T

mm downwards while operating from
Reverse to Normal.
10 Locking tappet stroke of Rack&Pinion ( ) T

lever is 40 mm upwards while operating
from Normal to Reverse.
11 Locking tappet stroke of Rack&Pinion is ( ) T

40 mm downwards while operating from
Reverse to Normal.
12Locking tappet stroke is 20 mm upwards ( ) T
81 | P a g e
while operating from Normal to Pull of the
miniature lever.
13Locking tappet stroke is 20 mm ( ) T

downwards while operating from Normal
to Push of the miniature lever.
14500 mm stroke Direct lever operates the ( ) T

signal without detector up to 1200 Mts.
15 600 mm stroke Direct lever operates the ( ) T
signal without detector greater than 1200
Mts.
82 | P a g e
1 500 mm stroke Clutch lever operates the Points ( ) T
6 up to 500 Mts.
1 600 mm stroke Clutch lever operates the Point ( ) T
7 up to 730 Mts.
1 500 mm stroke Clutch lever operates the ( ) T
8 Detector up to 600 Mts.
1 600 mm stroke Clutch lever operates the ( ) T
9 Detector up to 730 Mts.
2 500 mm stroke Clutch lever operates the Signal ( ) T
0 with Detector up to 600 Mts.
2 600 mm stroke Clutch lever operates the Signal ( ) T
1 with Detector up to 730 Mts.
2 The stroke of the Rack& Pinion lever is 200 mm ( ) T
2
2 Rack& Pinion lever can operate the single end ( ) T
3 points up to 460 Mts.
2 Rack& Pinion lever can operate the single end ( ) T
4 points up to 460 Mts.
2 The Rack& Pinion lever can operate the double ( ) T
5 end points up to 275 Mts.
2 The rope drum and the lever handle are rigidly ( ) T
6 fixed in the Direct lever.
2 Conflicting functions can be operated through 3- ( ) T
7 position miniature lever.
2 Rope drum and the lever handle are connected ( ) T
8 through a spring loaded clutch
2 Rope drum can rotate independent of the lever ( ) T
9 handle in clutch lever
3 85 Kgs tension difference in the transmission ( ) T
0 should not cause the clutch lever to trip
Chapter-3(Coupling of levers)
31 Coupling of levers economizes cost of material of ( ) T

one transmission.
32 Coupling of levers economizes cost of installation of ( ) T

one transmission.
33 Coupling of levers economizes cost of maintenance ( ) T

of one transmission.
34 Coupling of levers economizes cost of one ( ) T

compensator.
35 Coupling of levers economizes cost of one signal ( ) T

mechanism when located on the same signal post.
83 | P a g e
36 Coupling of levers economizes cost of installation ( ) T
and maintenance of a signal mechanism.
37 The two levers should be adjacent in the lever frame ( ) T

for coupling.
38 The two levers should bear consecutive numbers for ( ) T

coupling.
39 Length of transmission between the two coupled ( ) T

functions should not be greater than 73 Mts.
40 Push-Pull coupling to be adopted for the conflicting ( ) T

functions.
41 Pull-Pull coupling to be adopted for the successive ( ) T

operated functions.
42 Pull wires of both the coupling device levers are ( ) T

connected to the coupling device levers in Push-Pull
coupling.
43 Return wire of first operated lever and Pull wire of ( ) T

second operated lever are connected are connected
to the coupling device levers in Pull-Pull coupling.
(T)
44 L.Q. Main and Loop Line home signals are ( ) T

connected in Push-Pull coupling.
45 L.Q. or U.Q. Ist loop and 2nd loop home signals are ( ) T
(T)
46 A starter and a shunt below starter are connected in ( ) T

Push-Pull coupling.
47 Two shunt signals one below the other are ( ) T

48 A Home Signal and a Calling on signal below Home ( ) T

signal are connected in Push-Pull coupling.
(T)
49 Normal and Reverse detectors are connected in ( ) T

Push-Pull coupling.
84 | P a g e
50 Main line Home signal on a multiple aspect signalling ( ) T
territory are connected in Pull-Pull coupling.
(T)
51 Outer and Warner Signals located on the same post ( ) T

are connected in Pull-Pull coupling.
(T)
52 Hook lock is adopted to prevent the tripping of a ( ) T

coupled clutch lever.
Chapter-4(Points)
53 The rack movement during unlocking of point is 51 ( ) T

mm.
54 The rack movement during Point setting stroke ( ) T

107mm.
55 The rack movement during unlocking of point is 42 ( ) T

mm.
56 The point mechanism movement during unlocking of ( ) T

point is 127 mm.
57 The point mechanism movement during Point setting ( ) T

stroke 268mm.
58 The point mechanism movement during unlocking of ( ) T

point is105 mm.
59 The total movement of rack during its lever operation ( ) T

is 200 mm.
60 Broken wire lock is adopted to prevent the operation ( ) T

of points when the last pull wire is broken
61 Broken wire lock pawls must be tested once in every ( ) T

quarter.
62 The width of the lock plunger on EFPL is 49.8 mm. ( ) T
63 The width of the locks on the EFPL is 38 mm ( ) T

independently for N and R___
64 The two locks on the EFPL are staggered by 12 mm. ( ) T
65 The two locks on the EFPL are separated by the ( ) T

distance by 158 mm.
85 | P a g e
66 Staggering of locks on EFPL proves correct setting of ( ) T
Points.
67 Separation of locks on EFPL facilitates economy in ( ) T

operation of point and lock.
68 EFPL to be connected by the thumb rule “left in right ( ) T

out”
69 The pitch of the notches on split lock stretchers with ( ) T

EFPL is 127 mm in BG
70 The movement of cross slide when unlocked in EFPL ( ) T

is 16 mm.
71 The movement of cross slide when relocked in EFPL ( ) T

is 16 mm.
72 The movement of cross slide during point operation ( ) T

in EFPL is zero mm.
73 PWI must bring the track on either side of the point to ( ) T

correct alignment.
74 PWI must ease off rail joints on either side of points ( ) T

to be interlocked
75 PWI must close the stock rail joints associated with ( ) T

lock bars.
76 PWI must provide ballast fully and pack all points ( ) T

which are to be interlocked.
77 PWI must take adequate measures to prevent creep ( ) T

in the vicinity points.
78 PWI must provide creep and level pillars to prevent ( ) T

creep in the vicinity points.
79 PWI must arrange the sleepers on adjacent track to ( ) T

facilitate rod/wire transmission to cross.
80 PWI must provide and fix special timbers where ( ) T

required
81 PWI must provide gauge tie plate correctly PWI must ( ) T

adjuste loose heel switches so that they can be
thrown both way with ease
82 Loose heel switches can be housed against the stock ( ) T
86 | P a g e
rail by hand and remain there when the pressure is
removed.
83 The planed surface of the switch rail should fully ( ) T

house against the stock rails for a sufficient length.
84 Fixed heel switches lie in the mid-position and flex ( ) T

equally in the normal and Reversed positions. .
85 Point should be fitted with fitted flexible stretchers so ( ) T

that they flex equally in the normal and reverse
Positions
86 Point should be fitted provided with a stop for the ( ) T

open position of a single switch layout.
87 Facing point lock is fixed at 500mm from the gauge ( ) T

face in B.G.
CHAPTER : 5 : SIGNALS
88 Signal mechanism should prevent inaccuracies in the ( ) T

transmission of lever strokes helps display of correct
signal aspects.
89 Signal mechanism should provide broken wire ( ) T

protection
90 Signal mechanism should co-relate the down rod ( ) T

movement with that of the mechanism drum.
91 Signal mechanism should make the maximum torque ( ) T

required for signal operation
92 Signal mechanism should increase the range of ( ) T

signal operation & ease of lever operation.
93 A single signal mechanism has one stop ( ) T
94 A coupled signal mechanism has two stops ( ) T
95 The cam paths are identical in the Universal signal ( ) T

mechanism
96 Concentric path of Signal mechanism provides ( ) T

stability to the 'ON' and 'OFF' aspects of the Signal
arm
97 0 - 450 - 900 Signal Mechanism is used for working 3 ( ) T
87 | P a g e
aspects main line Home used for working 3 aspects
main line Home
98 450 - 0 - 900 Signal Mechanism is used for working ( ) T

the distant signal.
CHAPTER: 6: DETECTORS
99 Detector is used to prove the position of the points ( ) T
100 Detector should be capable of being used in a signal ( ) T

transmission
101 Detector is used to ensure the correct setting of the ( ) T

route.
102 Length of Bottom rim 176 mm. ( ) T
103 Length of Detecting rim 869 mm. ( ) T
104 Length of Control rim 75 mm. ( ) T
105 Length of Locking rim 30 mm. ( ) T
106 Height of Bottom rim 10 mm. ( ) T
107 Height of Control rim 25 mm. ( ) T
108 Height of Detecting rim 10 mm. ( ) T
109 Height of Locking rim 10 mm. ( ) T
110 Detector detects the correct relation between switch ( ) T

and stock rails.
111 Detector locks the points in the last operated position ( ) T

when the detector is operated.
112 Detector locks the points in the last operated position ( ) T

if the detector transmission wire opposite this rim
breaks.
113 Detector permits the detector to be installed in a ( ) T

signal transmission.
114 Locking Rim establishes correct relation between ( ) T

switch and stock rails.
115 Locking Rim locks the points in the last operated ( ) T
88 | P a g e
position when the wire opposite this rim breaks.
116 Control Rim proves the route ( ) T
117 Control Rim acts as a limiting stop in the event of ( ) T

wire breakage
118 Control Rim helps the locking to lock the points in the ( ) T
last operated position in the event of wire breakage
119 Control Rim helps the Locking rim to lock the points ( ) T
in the last operated position in the event of wire
breakage.
120 Control Rim helps the Detecting rim to lock the points ( ) T
in the last operated position in the event of wire
breakage.
121 Control Rim ensures the tripping of clutch lever. ( ) T

(T)
CHAPTER : 7: COMPENSATORS
122 Double wire compensator introduces initial tension ( ) T

68 kgs. in the transmission wires with the
transmission at rest.
123 The compensator levers should be locked during ( ) T

operation of the lever.
124 Stretch in the intact wire incase of point transmission ( ) T

is 100 mm
125 Wire breakage mark is indicated by 6 mm counter ( ) T

sunk depression
126 Compensator locking stroke should not be greater ( ) T

than 25 mm
127 Compensator levers are free to oscillate when the ( ) T

transmission is at rest
128 Single compensator will have 3 pairs of wheels. ( ) T
129 Coupled compensator will have 4 pairs of wheels. ( ) T
CHAPTER : 8: TRANSMISSIONS
130 Double Wire transmission should be laid straight ( ) T

alignment.
89 | P a g e
131 Inter distance between two pulley stakes should not ( ) T
be greater than 20 Mts in case of Signals.

be greater than 15 Mts in case of Points.

be greater than 15 Mts in case of Detectors.

be greater than 15 Mts in case of Signals with
Detectors.
135 Pulley Stakes should be properly leveled. ( ) T
136 Pulley Stakes should be rigidly fixed in the ground. ( ) T
137 Bottom most pulley should be 300 mm clear of ( ) T

ground in the D.W transmission.
138 Fixing of Pulley stakes in the side drains should be ( ) T

avoided
139 Wires and ropes must not scrap against walls ( ) T

protecting covers platform ramps, rails and sleepers.
140 At level crossing gate transmission should run in ( ) T

RCC troughs and steel cover plates.
(T)
141 Transmission running in the diversion from straight ( ) T

up to 10 0 should run through diversion pulley.
(T)
142 Transmission running in the diversion from 10 0 up to ( ) T

30 0 should run through horizontal diversion wheel of
dia 195 mm.
143 Transmission running in the diversion greater than ( ) T

should run through horizontal diversion wheel of dia
225 mm.
1 25 KV AC 50 Hz single phase power supply for electric traction is( )
90 | P a g e
derived from
a) State grid b) Central grid c) Railway grid d) None

2 OHE with automatic tensioning is called ( )
a) Regulated OHE b) Un-regulated OHE c) Ire-regulated

OHE d) None
3 The normal height of contact wire for regulated OHE above rail level
( )
is
a) 6.55m b) 7.59 m c) 5.55m d) None

4 Under bridges, the height of contact wire on BG is ( )
a) 5.55m b) 4.5 m c) 4.65m d) None

5 On BG straight tracks, the catenary system is supported at ( )
maximum intervals of
a) 82m b) 62m c) 72m d) None

6 Contact wire staggered on either side of centre line track on ( )
straight line tracks is
a) 200mm b) 300mm c) 29m d) None

7 Contact wire staggered on either side of centre line track on ( )
curved tracks is
a) 300mm b) 400mm c) 600m d) None

2.SIGNAL CLEARANCE AND VISIBILITY ( )
8 For 25 KV A.C vertical clearance between any live part of ( )
OHE and part of any fixed structure to a moving dimension is
a) 300mm b) 400mm c) 320mm d) None

9 For 25 KV A.C vertical clearance between any live part of ( )
OHE and part of any fixed structure to a stationary dimension
is

10 For 25 KV A.C lateral clearance between any live part of OHE ( )
and part of any fixed structure to a moving dimension is

11 For 25 KV A.C lateral clearance between any live part of OHE ( )
and part of any fixed structure to stationary a dimension is

12 Normal implantation of RE mast from centre line of nearest ( )
track
a) 3.5m b) 4.5m c) 2.5 m d) None

13 The nearest part of the signal post from the centre line of track shall
( )
be
91 | P a g e
a) 3.5m b) 2.844 c) 2.5 m d) None
14 The distance between the signal and the mast in front of it shall ( )
not be less than
a) 40m b) 50m c) 30m d) None

15 The distance between the signal and the mast just in advance ( )
of signal
normally
a) 40m b) 50m c) 10m d) None

3. PROTECTION OF OPERATING AND S&T STAFF (T/F)
16 For rod running under the track, the top of the rod shall not be ( )
less Than 40 mm below the bottom of the rail.
17 The distance between any OHE mast and the point rod shall ( )
not be less than 40 mm.
18 Each rod shall be provided with an insulator immediately ( )
outside the cabin in the lead-out as close to the cabin as
possible.
19 An additional insulator shall be provided between the last ( ) T
adjustable crank and the point/lock bar
20 If the rod transmission is more than 400 metres, additional ( ) F
insulators shall be provided on each rod at every 400metres
21 The distance between two consecutive insulators on the same ( ) T
rod should be lesser than 300 metres.
22 The wire insulator shall conform to IRS Spec. No. S47-74. ( ) T
23 An insulator shall be provided in each wire near the gear of ( ) T
operation
24 A wire insulator to be provided at every 300mts of wire ( ) T
transmission
25 The horizontal distance between two wires shall not be less ( ) F
than 60 mm
26 The vertical distance between two wires shall not be less than ( )
200 mm.
4. EARTHLING ARRANGEMENTS
27 The lever frame and other metallic frames of the cabin shall ( ) T
be connected together to a separate earthing.
28 The earthing shall not be provided at every location box where ( ) F
cable terminate.
29 Earth connected for lightening discharger should not be more ( ) T
than 10 Ohms
30 Earth connected for equipment should not be less than 10 ( ) F
Ohms.
31 Earth connected Axle counter cable (screened) in ac ( ) T
electrified area should not be more than 1 Ohm.
32 Where more than one earthing arrangements are employed, ( ) F
the distance between earthing electrodes shall not be less
than 6metres.
33 The clearance of equipment earths from system earths provided by ( ) F
92 | P a g e
the Electrical Dept. of Railways or any other administration shall not
be less than 30 meters
5. LAYING OF SIGNALLING CABLES ( )
34 The cables laid parallel to the track buried at a depth of 2 m ( )
minimum.
35 The depth of tail cables shall not be less than 1 m. ( )
36 If cable is laid one meter from the RE mast its trench depth ( )
shall not be more than 0.5m.
37 If cable is laid in concrete/HDPE pipes up to 3 meters on ( )
either side of mast, the distance between the mast and trench
can be reduced to 0.5 meters
38 If the cable is laid at more than 0.5 meters depth the distance ( )
between trench and mast shall not be less not be less than 3
meters.
39 In the vicinity of traction sub station the cables shall be laid on ( )
the side of the track opposite to the sub-station side
40 Cables shall be laid at least 10 meters away from the ( )
switching station earthing
41 During track crossings, the cables should cross the track at ( )
right angles
42 During track crossings, the cables can cross the track under ( )
points and crossings
43 During track crossings, the cables are to be laid in concrete ( )
pipes while crossing the track.
44 During track crossings, the cables shall be buried at a depth of ( )
1.0 metre below the bottom of the rail.
45 At out side of station limits, the cable shall be laid 5 to 6 ( )
meters from the nearest centre line of the track.
46 At with in station limits, the cable shall be laid not less than 5.5 ( )
meters from the nearest centre line of the track
6. STRAY CURRENTS ( )
47 Stray voltage in a track circuit shall not be more than 100mV. ( )
48 The total stray current shall not exceed 10mA for a track ( )
circuit length less than100m
49 The total stray current shall not exceed 10mA for a track ( )
circuit length more than100m
7. ALTERATIONS TO TRACK CIRCUITS

50 Only 09 ohms track relay should be used in AC RE area ( )
51 Only single rail DC track circuit should be used in AC RE area. ( )
52 In DC single rail track circuit feed end is protected by “B type” ( )
choke.
53 Maximum length of DC track circuit with wooden sleepers is ( )
250m.
54 Maximum length of DC track circuit with PSC sleepers is ( )
350m.
55 Maximum length of DC track circuit with QBAT relay and ( )
choke at feed-end is 450m
INDUCTION & ITS EFFECTS ON SIGNALLING ( )
93 | P a g e
56 Electro static effects in signalling circuit can be nullified by ( )
transferring the circuits in to Under ground cables.
57 Electro static effects in signalling circuit directly proportional to ( )
Length of parallelism.
58 Electro static effects in signalling cable inversely proportional ( )
to distance of separation between catenary and cable.
59 If whole of the return current passing the rails, then the ( )
voltage induced in a signaling cable which laid equal-distance
from catenary & rail is 35v/km
60 In screened cable by earthing of metallic sheath voltage induced in ( )
cable is reduced.
61 Catenary current in old design is 600A D/L, 300A in single ( )
line.
62 Short circuit current in old design is 4500A. ( )
63 Rail impedance in old design is 0.6 ohms. ( )
64 Rail reduction factor in old design is 0.56 for S/L 0.4 for D/L. ( )
65 Cable screening factor in old design is 9.6 ( )
66 A common design was adopted for single and double/multiple ( )
track electrified sections in old design
67 Due to electro-magnetic induction the voltage induced in ( )
signalling scrneed cable in old design is 35V/KM.
signaling un-scrneed cable in old design is 95V/KM.
69 Max. Length of a circuit parallelism with screened cable is 3.5 ( )
km in old design.
70 Max. Length of a circuit parallelism with un-screened cable is ( )
1.9 km in old design.
71 Glow voltage of 12v signal bulb on primary of signal ( )
transformer (110/12) is 21V.
72 Glow voltage of 12v signal bulb on secondary of signal ( )
transformer (110/12) is 5V.
73 Direct feeding range of signals with scrneed cable is 600m. ( )
74 Direct feeding range of signals with un- scrneed cable in old ( )
design is 330m
75 Shelf type line relays tested under BSS 1659, RE.Spec. ( )
187/11, are only AC immunised
76 In case of track relays Copper slugs & a magnetic shunt is ( )
used to make the relay to AC immunised.
77 In case of Shelf type line relays no extra materials used to ( )
make relay AC immunised.
78 AC. immunized Shelf type track relay is immune to 65VAC ( )
79 QAT2 track relay is immune up to 50V AC. ( )
80 Factor of safety in old design is 2.5. ( )
81 QBAT track relay is immune up to 8OV AC ( )
82 Shelf type line relays are immune up to 250V AC. ( )
83 In case of siemens relays K-50B type relays only AC ( )
immunized.
84 Safe handling voltage in old design is 100V. ( )
85 Remote feeding method is just extension of direct feeding. ( )
94 | P a g e
86 Screening factor of Tele. Com cable is 0.1. . ( )
EVALUATION AND UPGRADATION OF EXISTING SYSTEM DESIGN-
VARIOUS PARAMETERS
87 Catenary current in new design is 1000A D/L, 800A in single ( )

line.
88 Short circuit current in new design on D/L 10000A. ( )
89 Short circuit current in new design on S/L 6000A. ( )
90 Rail impedance in new design is 0.701 Single Line ( )
91 Rail impedance in new design is 0.561 Double Line ( )
92 Rail Reduction Factor in new design for 0.3926 Single Line. ( )
93 Rail Reduction Factor in new design for 0.566 Single Line. ( )
94 Using of screened cable discontinued since we are unable to ( )
maintain earth resistance as 0.2ohams to get 0.4
screening factor.
95 New screening factor is 0.91. ( )
Induced Voltages due to Higher Catenary Currents
signalling cable in new design on D/L is 95V/KM
signalling cable in new design on S/L is 120 V/KM
REVISED DESIGN OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM TO SUIT ( )
HIGH CATENARY CURRENTS
98 Direct feeding range of signals on D/L in new design is 226m. ( )
99 Direct feeding range of signals on S/L in new design is 180m. ( )
100 Safe handling voltage in new design is 400V ( )
101 Max. Length of a circuit parallelism on D/L in new design is ( )
2.3 KM
102 Max. Length of a circuit parallelism on S/L in new design is ( )
2.1KM
103 Factor of safety in new design is 3.5 ( )
104 AC. Immunity level of GRS 5E point machine is 90V ( )
105 Maximum permissible separation between Point Contractor ( )
and GRS 5E Point Machine on single line is 400m
and GRS 5E Point Machine on double line is 630m
107 AC. Immunity level of IRS-24 point machine is 90V ( )
and IRS-24 Point Machine on single line is 910m
and IRS-24 Point Machine on double line is 2.1KM.
and SIEMENS IA type Point Machine on double line is
1.1KM.
and SIEMENS IB type Point Machine on double line is
2.1KM.
95 | P a g e
and SIEMENS IB type Point Machine on single line is 1650M.
and SIEMENS IC type Point Machine on double line is
1850M.
and SIEMENS IC type Point Machine on single line is 2.2
KM.
115 AC. Immunity level of SIEMENS IB type Point machine is ( )
300V
116 AC. Immunity level of SIEMENS IC type Point machine is ( )
500V
117 As per RDSO specification No.S24/90 - for Electrical Point ( )
Machine non-trailable
type, specifies the A.C. immunity level of Electrical Point
Machine shall not be less
than 160V RMS at 50 Hz
1.Ans; a 26. Ans. T 51.Ans; T 76. Ans; T 101. Ans; F

2.Ans; a 27. Ans. T 52.Ans; T 77.Ans; T 102Ans; T
3.Ans; c 28. Ans. F 53.Ans; F 78.Ans; F 103.Ans; F
4.Ans; c 29. Ans. T 54Ans; T 79 Ans; T 104.Ans; T
5.Ans; c 30. Ans. F 55Ans; F 80.Ans; T 105. Ans; F
6.Ans; a 31 Ans. T 56. Ans; T 81. Ans; T 106.Ans; T
7.Ans; a 32. Ans. F 57.Ans; T 82.Ans; F 107Ans; F
8.Ans; c 33. Ans. F 58.Ans; T 83. Ans; T 108.Ans; T
9.Ans; b 34..Ans; F 59.Ans; F 84 Ans; F 109.Ans; F
10.Ans; b 35.Ans; F 60. Ans; T 85. Ans; T 110. ANS;T
11.Ans; c 36.Ans; T 61 Ans; T 86. Ans; T 111.Ans; T
12.Ans; c 37.Ans; T 62Ans; F 87Ans; T 112. Ans; T
13.Ans; b 38.Ans; T 63. Ans; F 88.Ans; F 113. Ans; F
14.Ans; c 39.Ans; T 64. Ans; T 89. Ans; T 114.Ans; T
15.Ans; c 40.Ans; F 65Ans; F 90.Ans; T 115.Ans; T
16.Ans; T 41Ans; T 66Ans; T 91.Ans; T 116. Ans; F
17.Ans; T 42Ans; F 67.Ans; T 92.Ans; T 117.Ans; T
18. Ans. T 43.Ans; T 68.Ans; F 93Ans; F
19.Ans. T 44.Ans; T 69.Ans; T 94 Ans; T
20. Ans. F 45Ans; F 70.Ans; F 95. Ans; T
21.Ans. T 46.Ans; T 71.Ans; T 96.Ans; T
22. Ans. T 47.Ans; T 72.Ans; F 97.Ans; F
23. Ans. T 48.Ans; T 73.Ans; T 98. Ans; F
24.Ans. T 49.Ans; T 74.Ans; F 99.Ans; T
25.Ans. F 50Ans; T 75. Ans; T 100. Ans; T
SECONDARY CELLS
If the load current is 4A and backup time required is 10Hrs then
recommended capacity of Lead Acid Cell is ______
B) 60 AH C) 80 AH D) 120 AH
Maximum permissible load on 120AH capacity Lead Acid cell is
96 | P a g e
________
B) 20 A C) 10 A D) 24 A
Voltage of the fully charged lead acid cell is ________ V
B) 2.2 V C) 2.3 V D) 2.4
End point voltage of the lead acid cell is _______ V

B) 1.9 V C) 2.0 V D) 2.2 V
Specific gravity of the discharged lead acid cell is ___________ in terms

of hydrometer reading.
B) 1200±5 C) 1210±5 or 1220 D) 1240±5
Specific gravity of the fully-charged Lead Acid cell is ________ in terms

of Hydrometer reading.
B) 1200±5 C) 1210±5 D) 1240±5
MULTIPLE CHOICES:
STATE TRUE or FALSE
1 If the load current is 8A and backup time required is 10Hrs then ( ) F

recommended capacity of Lead Acid Cell is 80AH
2 During the preparation of electrolyte always add acid to distilled ( ) T
water only, but not water to acid.
3 In Lead Acid cells, electrolyte level should be maintained at ( ) T
12mm to 15mm above the plates.
4 If the Lead acid cells are continuously used in “FLOAT Charging” ( ) T
then equalising charge must be given once in 3 months.
5 In Lead Acid cells, Boost charging current must given at the rate ( ) T
of C/10 Amp
6 LMLA cells are preferred over VRLA cells for signaling ( ) T
application.
97 | P a g e
BATTERY CHARGER
MULTIPLE CHOICES:
1 Battery charger of 24V can charge maximum ______ no. of cells. ( ) D
A) 24 B) 12 C) 13 D) 14
2 Recommended current rating of Battery charger for charging ( ) C

120AH Lead Acid cell is _______________.
A) 12 A B) 24 A C) 30 A D) 40 A
3 For charging of 200 AH cells _____________ amp capacity ( ) D

charger is required.
A) 20 A B) 24 A C) 30 A D) 40 A
4 Boost charging voltage of the lead acid cell is ______ ( ) C
A) 2.2 V B) 2.3 V C) 2.4 V D) 2.7 V
5 Initial charging voltage of the lead acid cell is _________ ( ) D
A) 2.2 V B) 2.3 V C) 2.4 V D) 2.7 V
6 Float charging voltage of the Automatic battery charger (IRS: ( ) A

86/200) is adjustable from ________ per cell.
A) 2.12 to 2.3 V B) 2.2 to 2.3 V C) 2.12 to 2.4 VD) 2.12 to
2.7 V
7 Chargers used for Axle counter installations, the r.m.s ripple shall ( ) A
be less than______.
A) 10mV B) 50mV C) 100mV D) 200mV
8 Chargers used for Axle counter installations, the peak to peak ( ) B
noise voltage shall be less than 50mV.
A) 10mV B) 50mV C) 100mV D) 200mV
9 Battery charger working in manual mode, the charger output ( ) B
voltage shall be _____ V per cell.
A) 2.2 V B) 2.25 V C) 2.3 V D) 2.4 V
10 Battery charger generates low battery alarm when the battery ( ) A

voltage falls to ______ V per cell.
A) 1.95 V B) 2.0 V C) 2.2 V D) 2.25 V
11 Battery charger generates start DG set non-resettable alarm ( ) A

when the battery voltage falls to 1.90V/cell.
A) 1.9 V B) 2.0 V C) 2.2 V D) 2.25 V
12 Battery charger isolates battery from the load when the battery ( ) D
voltage falls to ________V per cell.
A) 2.0 V B) 2.15 V C) 2.2 V D) 1.8 V
STATE TRUE or FALSE
98 | P a g e
60V battery charger is having the provision for charging the 30 or
31 or 32 no. of cells.
Battery charger can able to give the constant output voltage with
the input Voltage variation of 160VAC to
270VAC.
110V battery charger is having the provision for charging
maximum 55 no. of cells.
In IRS: 86/2000 Battery charger the boost charging current
control & float voltage adjustment is possible only
in Auto mode.
IPS SYSTEM
STATE TRUE or FALSE
1 Blanking of signals due to power supply failure can be effectively ( ) T
and economically prevented by using IPS.
2 In IPS system, inverters are configured with (1+1) configuration. ( ) T
3 All the DC-DC converters except for Relays (internal) of IPS ( ) T
system are used in (N+1) load sharing configuration.
4 In IPS system, Inverter output is used for the load of DC Track ( ) F
circuits.
5 In case of IPS system, normally only one Battery bank is used. ( ) F
6 An inverter is used in IPS system to convert the A.C. power into ( ) T
D.C. power.
7 DC-DC converters of IPS system for Relays (internal) are used ( ) F
in (N+1) load sharing configuration.
8 SMRs of IPS system are provided with in (N+2) load ( ) T
configuration.
9 In IPS system Inverter-2 will be automatically connected to the ( ) T
load, when Inverter-1 output is failed.
10 In IPS system CVT or AVR will be automatically connected to ( ) T
the load, when Inverter-1 and Inverter-2 output is failed.
11 With IPS System, DG set is not required ( ) F
12 Class B and Class C arresters are used in IPS for stage1 and ( ) T
stage2 protection
13 IPS system generates Start D.G set audio-visual alarm with 50% ( ) T
depth of discharge of Battery bank.
14 IPS system generates Stop D.G set audio-visual alarm ( ) T
whenever FRBC / SMR change over to float mode from boost
mode.
OBJECTIVE: BATTERIES:
Fill up the blanks with suitable words:
1 I.S. Specification number of battery graded Con.Sulphuric acid ( )

__________ (IS266-1977)
99 | P a g e
2 I.S. Specification number of Battery graded Distilled water ( )
is__________(IS1069)
3 I.S. Specification number of acid resistant paint is___________. ( )
4 I.S. Specification number of Plante positive Lead acid cells ( )
__________.
5 I.S. Specification number of pasted plates Lead Acid cells ( )
__________.
6 I.S. Specification number of tubular positive Lead Acid cells ( )
__________.
7 I.S. Specification number of Dry Leclanche cell is ____________. ( )
8 I.R.S. Specification number of Auto/Manual battery charger ( )
___________.
9 I.S. Specification number of Ni- Cd rechargeable pocket plated ( )
batteries is______________.
10 I.R.S. Specification of Low maintaince lead acid batteries ( )
is__________.
11 I.R.S. Specification number of SMF lead acid batteries ( )
is_____________.
12 Voltage of a fully charged Lead Acid cell is______________. ( )
13 Lead Acid cell can be discharged up to voltage of ( )
____________.
14 Separators prevent ____________ between _______ & ( )
__________ plates in Lead Acid cell.
15 The active materials in Lead acid cell are ___________, ( )
________ &_____________.
16 A 400Ahcapacity Lead Acid cell can be charged with a maximum ( )
current of ___________.
17 Capacity of any Lead Acid cell is given in___________ with ( )
________ Hrs rating.
18 Electrolyte used in Lead Acid cell is _______ _____________. ( )
19 Specific gravity of battery graded Con. Sulphuric Acid is ( )
____________.
20 Initial charging current rate can be taken as _______% of its ( )
capacity in case of L,A, cells if manufacturer’s rating is not
available.
21 Maximum electrolyte temperature allowed during Initial charging ( )
of Lead Acid Cell is__________ºC.
22 Electrolyte for lead acid cell can be prepared by adding ( )
_________ to __________ in small quantities.
23 To avoid lead corrosion on battery connectors and terminals ( )
apply ______________ or _______________.
24 Per cell voltage in case of Float charging is_________. ( )
25 Per cell voltage in case Boost charging is___________. ( )
26 The rate of self discharge in case of Lead Acid cell can be taken ( )
as______ per AH.
27 Specific gravity of electrolyte varies with temperature at the rate ( )
of ___________ per 1ºC.
28 The measuring instrument used for measuring Specific gravity is ( )
_____________.
Sulphation can be identified by ____________ & ___________.
100 | P a g e
29 Sulphation in Lead Acid cell increases ___________________ in ( )
Lead Acid Cell.
30 In VRLA cell/battery the compensation of distilled water is by ( )
_________________.
31 In VRLAB the pressure inside is regulated by ___________. ( )
32 ____________ indicates the fully charged condition of Lead Acid ( )
cell.
33 Internal resistance is maximum at _________ Specific gravity. ( )
34 If temperature increases the specific gravity _____________ in ( )
Lead Acid Cell.
35 After discharge, both the plates becomes ________ in Lead Acid ( )
Cell,
36 The level of electrolyte above the plates should be ( )
always_________.
37 Buckling of plates in Lead Acid cell is due to ( )
_________________ of plates.
38 During Initial charging, the charging can be stopped only after ( )
____ % of AH input is fed.
39 The insulating pieces between positive and negative plates of a ( )
cell are called as _____________.
40 The ratio of Acid to Distilled water to get 1200 Specific gravity ( )
electrolyte is______: ________.
41 Voltage of a fully charged Nickle Cadmium cell is __________ . ( )
42 Electrolyte used in Ni-Cd cell is _____________. ( )
43 The active material on +ve plates in Ni-Cd cell is ( )
_________________.
44 The active material on –ve plates in Ni-Cd cell is ( )
_________________.
45 When Ni- Cd cell is discharged the Cadmium Hydroxide is ( )
reduced to __________________.
46 In Ni-Cd cell, the Lithium hydroxide is added to electrolyte to ( )
________________________.
47 In Ni-Cd cell the plate grids are made from _________ _______ ( )
________ _______________.
48 Specification number of sealed cylindrical Ni-Cd cell is ( )
______________.
49 Capacity range of pocket plated Ni-Cd cell is ( )
________________.
50 The material used for separators in Ni-Cd cell is ( )
__________________.
51 In Automatic Battery charger the output controlling device is ( )
______________.
52 Recommended current rating of charger for an 80AH battery with ( )
maximum permissible load of 12 Amps is ___________ Amps.
53 Automatic battery charger under S-86/20000 specification can ( )
supply constant output voltage for A.C. input variation from
________V to ______ V.
54 The rectifier circuit converts ___________ to ___________. ( )
55 In case of Ferro resonant type automatic regulator for sudden ( )
changes of input voltage or Load variation the response time is
101 | P a g e
< ____________.
56 In case of Ferro resonant type automatic regulator short circuit ( )
protection is achieved by__________________ winding.
57 Voltage of a Solar cell is ____________ . ( )
58 Charging current should be reduced when the battery starts ( )
_____________.
59 Per cell voltage in case of Initial charging is_____________. ( )
60 Per cell voltage in case of Boost charging is____________ ( )
61 Per cell voltage in case of Float charging is_____________. ( )
62 In case of Ni-Cd cell/Battery , charge input during first charge ( )
should be __________ capacity of C5 AH.
63 ____________ are formed on the plate surphase , when ( )
Sulphated.
64 Note down ___________ ____________ of each cell ( )
periodically.
65 The material used for grids in MFB is __________________. ( )
66 Topping up with distilled water in case of HDP plante Lead Acid ( )
cells can be done once in ________months.
67 Terminal voltage of a fully discharged Ni-Cd cell ( )
is____________.
68 When the Lead Acid cell is discharged completely, both the ( )
plates are converted into ____________ .
69 The material used for grid structure in Lead Acid cell ( )
is______________.
70 The insulation resistance of Mains transformer in battery charger ( )
should be more than ____________ M Ohms.
71 In battery charger the current rating of Diodeds & SCR’s should ( )
be more than ____________ current flowing through them.
72 The resistors power rating, used in battery charger should be ( )
__________.
73 Voltage rating of capacitors used in chargers should be _______ ( )
٪ above peak value.
74 I.S. Specification number of HRC fuses is ______________. ( )
75 Additional protection for chargers rated above 50 Amps shall be ( )
provided with extra _____________ & ___________.
76 Ripple in D.C. output of battery charger should be less ( )
than_________٪
77 Psophometric noise voltage in the output of a battery charger ( )
should be less than __________ Mv.
78 The charger works in ________________ condition, if battery ( )
draws current less than 5% of its set value.
79 The charger switches to ____________ when the battery draws ( )
currewnt more than 8-12% of the set current.
80 Power factor of an Automatic battery charger must be above ( )
_______ lagging in all modes.
81 No load AC input current shall be __________ value in case of ( )
Automatic battery charger.
82 In Automatic battery charger the gate pulses for SCR’s is ( )
generated by ____________ circuit.
83 In case of Automatic battery charger permitted variation in the ( )
102 | P a g e
output voltage over the entire range of input AC supply variation
is ___________.
84 The grid structure of Lead Acid cell is made from ( )
_________________ or ________________alloy.
85 Permissible raise in temperature above amient for Mains ( )
Transformer shall be __________.
86 ON/OFF switch in battery charger shall be of _____________ ( )
pole type.
87 The range of voltage control potentio meter in a battery charger ( )
shall be___________ to __________ V.
88 In chargers above 50Amps rating series fuses to be provided for ( )
______________ & ____________ elements.
89 Specific gravity of electrolyte ____________ when temp ( )
decreases.
90 Specific gravity correction factor per 1ºC is___________. ( )
91 Equavalising charging is necessary to a battery connected in ( )
___________ charging .
92 Use of ballast resistance in a battery charger ( )
is_______________.
93 Check _________, __________, ________ for every 8Hours ( )
during initial charging
94 Voltage of a Secondary cell depends on ______________ & ( )
______________
95 A 300 AH 10H battery can supply 20 Amps current for ( )
___________ number of hours.
96 IS Specification of a plante positive type cells is ( )
________________ (IS-1652)
97 IS Specification of Tubular positive type cells is _____________. ( )
(IS-1651)
98 Specific gravity correction factor per 1ºC is _____________. ( )
99 Negative plates are one more than the positive plates to provide ( )
______________________.
100 Vent holes are provided in vent cap to for ____________ to ( )
______________.
101 The level of electrolyte in Lead Acid Cell is indicated by ( )
____________________.
102 The level of electrolyte inside the cell is always be _______ '' ( )
above the plates.
103 The current inside the cell is carried by _____________. ( )
104 The separators used in VRLAB are made from ( )
_______________.
105 The grid in VRLAB are made from _______________ alloy. ( )
106 The normal battery operating temperature is ________ºC. ( )
107 SMF cells need much addition of distilled water due to ( )
_________________ principle.
108 The electronic device which converts AC to DC is called as ( )
_______________.
INVERTER:
109 Inverter converts ____________ to ___________. ( )
103 | P a g e
110 Efficiency range of an inverter should be within _________% to ( )
__________%,
111 Output frequency of inverter should be _____________ ( )
112 In case of solid state inverter no load current shall not exceed ( )
_______% of full load current.
113 Inverters of 500VA and above shall be provided with ( )
__________& __________ indications.
114 The PWM IC number used in 500 Watts inverter is ( )
______________.
115 SG2535A is an _______________________________ I.C. ( )
116 EMI/RFI filter is connected on the ______________ side of the ( )
inverter.
117 The inverter automatically shuts off when battery voltage goes ( )
below ___________ volts.
118 The inverter will be in OFF condition when mains A.C. supply is ( )
___________.
119 The Oscillator frequency inside the SG3525A I.C. is ________ ( )
Hz.
120 The power amplifier stage in inverter uses _______________ as ( )
power amplifier device.
121 MCCB means____________ _______ __________ ( )
___________.
122 The changeover time to inverter during Mains power failure is in ( )
________
123 Shut- off input to IC SG3525A is given to pin ( )
No_______________.
124 The insulation resistance of the inverter shall not be less ( )
than_________M Ohms under 40ºC.
Solar cells:
1 Solar cells converts __________ energy to _________ energy. ( )
2 Solar panel is a combination of _________ connected in ( )
___________ & __________ fashion.
3 The solar cell is made from __________ & ______________ ( )
materials.
4 Generation of electricity from Sun light is called ( )
as________________
5 A typical Solar cell is nothing but __________________ ( )
6 Conversion efficiency of a Silicon solar cell is ( )
_________________.
7 Falling of dust, dirt and snow, decreases the Solar arrays ( )
___________
8 A solar panel is installed inclined at an angle equal to the ( )
_____________
of the plane.
9 Surface of solar cell is coated with ________________ coating to ( )
increase
_____________.
104 | P a g e
10 Open circuit voltage of a solar cell is _______ V. ( )
Say TRUE or FALSE:
1 Hexagonal shape of a solar cell provides more utilization area ( )

2 Solar cell converts “Electrical energy” into “Solar energy” ( )
3 Solar panel is a combination of solar cells ( )
4 Voltage of each solar cell is 1.2 V ( )
5 Solar cells are made from semiconductor materials ( )
6 The semiconductor material used for solar cell is Aluminium ( )
7 Solar cell produces pollution ( )
8 Efficiency of a Solar cell is very high ( )
9 Solar system is having longer life ( )
10 Conventional Lead Acid Cells are suitable for Solar panel ( )
Uninterrupted power supply (UPS):
11 In Off-Line UPS the inverter is ON only when the mains supply ( )
__________.
12 Change over time in ON-line UPS is _____________ mS ( )
13 ____________ of batteries are preferred in UPS. ( )
14 Regulation of output voltage is done by using __________ ( )
principle in UPS
15 Normal PF rating of UPS is ________ ( )
16 In ON-Line UPS the battery will be always in ___________ ( )
condition.
17 __________ or __________ device are used in Power Amplifier ( )
stage of UPS.
Say TRUE or FALSE:

1 In Off-Line UPS the inverter is always in ‘ON’ condition ( )
105 | P a g e
2 In ON-Line UPS there is no change over time ( )
3 In put to UPS is A.C ( )
4 In OFF-Line UPS the relay will be OFF condition when AC input ( )
is present
5 UPS backup time can be increase by increasing the capacity of ( )
the battery
6 Only a single transformer is sufficient in ON-Line UPS ( )
7 In OFF-Line UPS the battery will be charge only when the ( )
inverter is ON
8 For UPS with rating higher than 2KVA IGBT device is used in ( )
power amplifier stage
Choose correct answer:

1)
1 The backup time in UPS depends on, ( )
A) Load B) Voltage C) Batter capacity D) all the three

2 The type of UPS used in Medical side is, ( )
A) ON-Line B) OFF-Line C) Line interactive D) Non of the above
3 Malfunctioning of UPS is avoided by incorporating, ( )

A) Fuse B) EMI/RFI filter C) Only filter D) controlling device
4 4) Input to an UPS is, ( )
A) Battery B) AC mains voltage C) rectifier output D) non of above
SMPS:
1 The switching & controlling element in SMPS is ___________________. ( )
2 The output voltage of SMPS is regulated by, ( )
A) converter transformer B) pulse width of controlling pulses C) input
rectifier D) filter circuit
3 SMPS of 100 Amps rating requires 3 SMR modules of each rating , ( )
A) 50Amps B) 25 Amps C) 100 Amps d) any value
4 The switching device used in SMPS is , ( )

A) transistor B) IGBT C) MOSFET D) Diode
5 The switching device in SMPS operates at, ( )
A) above 100KHz B) VF range C) 10-100 KHz D) 10-100MHz
106 | P a g e
6 The converter transformer in SMPS operates at low frequency ( )
7 The switching device in SMPS will be in always On condition ( )
8 SMPS is a modular type power supply ( )
Say TRUE or FALSE :-
1 The grids and separators will be effected if the specific gravity of electrolyte is ( )
below 1.240
2 The internal resistance is minimum at specific gravity 1.240 in Lead Acid cell ( )
3 Capacity of a Lead Acid cell is directly proportional to its length of service ( )
4 The Initial charging current is less than normal charging current ( )
5 Electrolyte can be prepared by adding distilled water to Sulphuric Acid ( )
6 During Initial charging add only distilled water ( )
7 The battery which is kept continuously under “Float charging” should be given ( )
“ Equavalising charge” to compensate low or uneven Sp. Gravities of cells
8 Buckling is one of the causes for internal short circuit ( )
9 The internally short circuited cell gasses freely ( )
10 Buckling of cell plates takes place due to excessive charging or discharging ( )
11 Shedding means falling of active material from the plates ( )
12 Do not allow the batteries to get fully discharged ( )
13 Boost charging charges the battery quickly ( )
14 The internally short leads to reverse polarity of the cell ( )
15 Formation of lead corrosion at cell terminals causes high resistance ( )
16 Rate of Trickle charging is 100 mA/AH capacity. ( )
17 Distilled water to be added in MFB ( )
18 Initial charging is a constant potential type of charging ( )
19 Gas recombination principle is used in maintaince free sealed L.A. battery ( )
20 Constant potential method is used to charge VRLA battery ( )
21 Voltage of a fully charged Ni-Cd cell is 2.1 V ( )
22 Distilled water to be added during initial charging to maintain the level ( )
23 Initial charging can be stopped before 50% of charging is completed ( )
24 Trickle charging is given to a fully discharged battery ( )
25 Boost charging is a constant potential type of charging ( )
26 The nominal cell voltage of a MFB lead acid battery is 2V ( )
27 Calcium alloy is having lower self discharge and increased conductivity ( )
28 Maximum electrolyte temperature allowed during charging is 100ºC ( )
29 The active material on the positive plates in Lead Acid cell is Spongy Lead ( )
107 | P a g e
30 Con. Sulphuric Acid is used as electrolyte in Lead Acid Cell ( )
31 Secondary cell voltage depends on the number of plates ( )
32 Ampere-Hour efficiency can be increaswd by controlling thje charging current ( )
33 Efficiency of a secondary battery is defind as the ratio of input divided by ( )
output
DG Set:
1 Fill up the blanks with suitable words: ( )
2 The D.G. Set converts _____________energy into ______________ energy. ( )
3 In Diesel engine the ___________ is compressed in the cylinder. ( )
4 During ______________ stroke the power is transmitted to the crank shaft. ( )
5 The liquid fuel is sprayed into the cylinder by ____________. ( )
6 The out-put voltage of generator is controlled by controlling the ( )
______________ of the shaft.
7 The speed of the Diesel engine is controlled by providing ________________ ( )
on the engine shaft.
8 The fuel used in Diesel engine is __________ oil. ( )
II. CHOOSE CORRECT ANSWER: ( )
1 The paper element of fuel filter is to be changed for every, ( )
A)250 Hrs B) 500 Hrs C) 800 Hrs D) 50 Hrs
2 Speed of the prime mover at full load is, ( )
A) 1200 RPM B) 1560 RPM C) 1570 RPM D) 1500 RPM
3 Engine starts and stops due to, ( )
A) Fuel tank filled completely B) air in fuel lines C) piston defective D) non
of the above
4 Compression ratio in Diesel engine is, ( )

A) 16:1 B) 1:16 C) 10:1 D) 5:1
5 Both the valves are closed during. ( )
A) suction stroke B) compression stroke C) exhaust stroke D) non of the
above
6 The valves in DG set are lifted by, ( )
A) Cams on cam shaft B) piston C) crank shaft D) non of the above
7 Engine starts but stops after some time due to, ( )
A) Air in fuel line B) Oil tank is full C) piston faulty D) non of the three
8 The fuel in diesel engine is ignited by, ( )
A) spark plug B) Compression C) piston D) Non of the three
9 Lubricating oil in Diesel engine is located at, ( )
A) Tank B) piston C) Sump D) non of the three
10 The fuel filter in Diesel engine is to be replace after, ( )
A) 500 Hrs B) 800 Hrs C) 1000 Hrs D) 500 Hrs
108 | P a g e
III. Say TRUE or FALSE:-
1 Spark ignition system is required in diesel engine ( )
2 Fuel tank in diesel engine should be cleaned for every 250 hours of working ( )
3 Excessive fuel consumption is due to incorrect value of fuel timing ( )
4 The exhaust valve opens during power stroke ( )
5 Governor throttle regulates the amount of fuel supplied to the engine ( )
6 The diesel engine is to be overhauled for every 500 Hours ( )
7 The power is transmitted to alternator by camshaft in diesel engine ( )
8 The valves are opened by livers in diesel engine ( )
IV) MATCH THE FOLLOWING:
1 Injector A) low ESR filter capacitors ( )

2 Piston B) stores mechanical energy ( )
3 Radiator C) charge/discharge system ( )
4 Fly wheel D) Cooling system ( )
5 SMPS E) compress the air ( )
6 Linear power supply F) spray liquid fuel ( )
7 Micro wave station G) low efficiency ( )
8 clean the air filter H) after 250 Hrs ( )
9 change the air filter I) for every 50 hrs element ( )
10 Clean the sump J) after 800 Hrs ( )
S.No. Question
1 When cascading is used in aspect control circuit them signal lamp to be used
is/are--------
a) SL18 b) SL21
c) SL35 d) a&c both
2 The signal lamp to be used in directional route indicator is/are ------------------

a) SL33 b) SL13
c) SL35 d) SL25
3 Locking provided in siemens and IRS point machine is ---------------- type.

a) Rotary b) straight trough
c) in & out d) clamp type
109 | P a g e
4 The signal lamp to be used in multi-lamp route indicator is/are ------------------
a) SL33 b) SL13
c) SL35 d) SL25
5 The signal lamp to be used in shunt signal (parallel) is/are -----------------

a) SL33 b) SL13
c) SL35 d) SL25
6 When point is not set , not lock OR both then ------------------ makes.
a) RC contact b) NC contact
c) RD contact d) a&b both
7 The signal lamp to be used in shunt signal (series) is/are ------------------
a) SL65 (60 voilt/25 watts) b) SL13
c) SL35 d) SL25
8 The signal lamp terminal voltage shall not be more than ------------- of rated voltage.
a) 90% b) 98 %
c) 80 % d) 12 %
9 The rating of SL 21 signal lamp is-----------------------.

a) 12 volts 24 watts & 12 volts 16 watts
b) 12 volts 33 watts & 12 volts 16 watts
c) 12 volts 24 watts & 12 volts 24 watts
d) 12 volts 16 watts & 12 volts 16 watts
10 The effective focal length of combination of inner colour lens and clear outer lens is
-----
a) 17 to 21mm b) 140mm
c) 100mm d) 5mm
11 Lamp to be used in ON aspect of signal is/are
a) SL21 b) SL35A
c) SL35B d) a&c
12 The rating of SL 18 signal lamp is-----------------------.
a) 12 volts 24 watts & 12 volts 16 watts
b) 12 volts 33 watts & 12 volts 33 watts
d) 12 volts 24 watts
13 When Distant in single distant territory displays proceed aspect then indicates ( ) d) a&c
-----------------
a) Run through on main line
b) run through on loop line
c) Train going to be received on main line band.
d) a&c
14 Red lamp protection provided to-----------------------

a) Protect blank signal
b) prevent blanking of signal
c) Replacement of signal to ON
110 | P a g e
d) a & b both
15 -----------------------------------ECR can be used for LED AC signal
a) Conventional ECR
b) LED AC ECR
c) LED DC ECR
d) a , b &
16 Normal working voltage of LED signal unit is / are -----------------
a) 110 volt AC b) 110 volt DC
c) 230 AC d) a&b
17 The insulation resistance of signaling cable shall not less than------------------- ( )
Chapter-2
1 The proceed aspect is displayed in four aspect automatic section ( ) b) 3

when ________ automatic sections ahead and overlap are clear.
a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 2
2 The rating of SL 35 A signal lamp is-----------------------. ( ) c) 12 volts 24

a) 12 volts 24 watts & 12 volts 16 watts watts & 12 volts
b) 12 volts 33 watts & 12 volts 16 watts 24 watts
3 The signal lamps are triple pin lamp to avoid---------------- ( ) b) out of focus
a) Lamp theft after replacement
b) out of focus after replacement of lamp of lamp
c) use for domestic purpose
d) loose grip
4 The no load current of signal transformer shall not be more than ( ) d) 15 mAmp
-------------------
a) 5 mAmp b) 15 Amp
c) 40 mAmp d) 15 mAmp
5 The rating of SL 35 B signal lamp is-----------------------. ( ) b) 12 volts 33
a) 12 volts 24 watts & 12 volts 16 watts watts & 12 volts
b) 12 volts 33 watts & 12 volts 33 watts 33 watts
6 The power ratting of signal transformer is ------------------- ( ) b) 40VA
a) 400VA b) 40VA
c) 4KVA d) 40KVA
7 The tapping on secondary side of signal transformer is/are ( ) d) a,b &c

-------------------
a) 13 volt b) 14.5 volt
c) 16 volt d) a,b &c
111 | P a g e
8 When MECR & Signal transformer are placed in side two aspect unit ( ) b) 8
then number of cable conductors required in tail cable (with double
cutting) are----------------------
a) 10 b) 8 c) 12 d) 6
1. SL-5 (e ) a) triple pole ON aspect
2. SL –18 (d ) b) triple pole OFF aspect
3. SL – 21 (c ) c) double pole ON aspect
4. SL – 35 A (b ) d) cascaded OFF aspect
5. SL – 35 B (a ) e) indication Lamp
1. colour inner lens (e ) a) 140mm yellow
2. Clear outer lens (d ) b) no lens
3. Route indicator lens (c ) c) 92mm
4. LED signal (b ) d) 213mm
5. Calling ON (a ) e) 140mm
State True or False

1 The 3 pins of CLS lamp are provided to prevent ( ) False
lamp theft
(True/False)
2 LED signal works on 110 volts AC only. ( ) False
(True/False)
3 All type ECR can be used with LED signal ( ) False
(True/False)
1 When Distant in double distant territory displays ( ) d) a&c

proceed aspect then indicates -----------------
c) Train going to be received on main line b.
d) a&c
112 | P a g e
2 When inner Distant in double distant territory displays ( ) a) Run through
proceed aspect then indicates ---------------- on main line
d) a&b
3 When Distant in double distant territory displays ( ) d) a&c

proceed aspect then indicates -----------------
c) Train going to be received on main line b.
d) a&c
4 When inner Distant in double distant territory displays ( ) a) Run through
proceed aspect then indicates ---------------- on main line
d) a&b
1 1SL 18 lamp and SL 35 A lamp can not used in cascaded ( ) False

off aspect.
(True/False)
2 LED signal unit and SL 35 A lamp can not used in ( ) False
cascaded off aspect.
(True/False)
3 Siemens ON ECR can be used in aspect control circuit ( ) False
with LED signal.
(True/False)
4 No load current of signal transformer shall not be more ( ) True
than 15 Milli Amps.
(True/False)
5 Normally No load current of signal transformer shall be ( ) False
measured on secondary side of transform.
(True/False)
6 Terminal voltage of signal lamp shall not be more than ( ) True
90% of ratted voltage of lamp.
(True/False)
7 Purpose cascading is to protect blank signal and red ( ) False
lamp protection is prevent blanking of signal
respectively
(True/False)
8 Purpose red lamp protection is prevent blanking of ( ) False
signal in case of OFF aspect lamp fuses.
(True/False)
9 One aspect of CLS unit contains two lenses, inner clear ( ) False
lens and outer colour lens.
113 | P a g e
(True/False)
10 Auxiliary filament of triple pole lamp will also burn ( ) False
while main filament is burning.
(True/False)
11 Proceed aspect of Distant Signal in single distant ( ) False
territory indicate run-through condition always.
(True/False)
12 The Distant Signal in double distant territory has total ( ) False
three aspects.
(True/False)
13 Home signal is always a slotted signal. ( ) False
(True/False)
( ) An
. S.No….n Question w
Track locking is made effective A&E positions on point lever.
1. (True/False)
Dead Approach to be provided where the sufficient length of Approach Track
2. circuit cannot be provided.
(True/False)
Indication locking is to be provided where there is no rigid connection between
3. the lever and its function.
(True/False)
The back locking on a signal lever will be effective at B position.
4.
(True/False)
The purpose of UYR1 and UYR2 circuits is to release the after the train is
5. received signals.
(True/False)
The purpose of ‘NA’ band contact across HR relay is to achieve cross
6. protection to HR relay .
(True/False)
The purpose of GECR contact in HR circuit is to avoid the bobbing of the
7. signal when the signal ahead is changing its aspects.
(True/False)
The purpose of JR back contact in HR circuit is to cancellation is not in
8. progress when the signal is being initiated.
(True/False)
To perform the function of lock bar, in power signaling track circuit & lever lock
9. ll be provided.
(True/False)
When a stop signal is taken off, the crank handle must be in locked condition.
10.
(True/False)
In junction type route indicator, the maximum number of routes can be
11. displayed is seven .
(True/False)
In junction type route indicator, to energize UECR minimum three
12. nos. of route lamps must be in lit condition.
(True/False)
114 | P a g e
The maximum number of routes which can be indicated by using
13. stencil type route indicator is four.
(True/False)
Approach locking is provided for the goods loop starter.
14. (True/False)
Indication locking on signals will be effective at B position of signal

lever.
15.
(True/False)
The berthing track circuit shall be proved in HR circuit of shunt

16. signal.
(True/False)
The approach locking is provided to prevent manipulation of the route when
train cross the signal.
17. (True/False)
All the track circuit in the route shall be proved in the back locking.
18.
(True/False)
Indication locking on signal lever is effective on ‘B’ &’D’ position. (True/False) ( ) (
19.
)
TSR circuit achieves one signal one-train principle. ( ( )T )
20.
(True/False)
Point in isolation must be proved in shunt signal control. ( ( )T )
21.
(True/False)
Track locking performs the function of lock bar. ( ( )T )
22.
(True/False)
UYR relays provided to prevent premature route release. ( ( )T )
23.
(True/False)
Chapter-1
In home signal HR circuit points in the route must be proved
1.
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit points in the over lap must be proved
2.
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit points in the isolation must be proved
3.
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit track circuit in the route must be proved
4.
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit track circuit in the berthing portion must be
5. proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit track circuit in the over lap must be proved
6.
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit crank handle in and locked must be proved
7.
(True/False)
8. In home signal HR circuit route release relays dropped position must be
115 | P a g e
proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit route cancellation relays dropped position must
9. be proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit calling on signal below home signal not operated
10. position must be proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit one signal one train feature must be proved
11.
(True/False)
12. In home signal HR circuit route lamps lit for diverging line must be proved
In home signal HR circuit route lamps not lit for straight line must be
13. Proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit LC gate closed and locked condition must
14. be proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit siding control normal position must be
15. proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit its control operated position in both positive and
16. negative limbs must be proved
(True/False)
In home signal HR circuit cross protection across HR must be proved
17.
(True/False)
S12 chapter 3.
1. To ensure the signal ahead is not blank ( ) False

in the HR circuit of home, only Main line
starter HECR & DECR in parallel are
proved.
2. The points in isolation must be proved in ( ) True
HR circuit of calling on signal.
3. All tracks in the route overlap and ( ) True

berthing shall be proved in home signal
HR.
4. For shunt signal, the route locking is up ( ) False
to berthing track included.
116 | P a g e
5. For approach locking of loop line starter, ( ) True
the berthing track alone is proved.
6. Calling signal detects all the points, which ( ) True

the main signal above it detects
excluding the overlap points.
7. Generally Dead Approach locking is ( ) True

provided for a home signal of wayside
station.
8. The CO signal will have that many ( ) False

numbers of routes as many overlaps
available.
9. The CO signal locks the starter ahead and ( ) True

vice versa.
10. The shunt signal signal is provided with ( ) True

approach locking.
11. In panel interlocking, the CO signal True
12. cancellation period is 240 seconds. ( ) True
13. . In panel interlocking, all signals except ( )

CO signal will have cancellation period of
120 seconds.
14. In panel interlocking for way side ( )

stations, the starter signal is provided
with cancellation period of 240 seconds.
chapter no.3- Key
1. False
2. True
117 | P a g e
3. True
4. False
5. True
6. True
7. True
8. False
9. True
10.True
11.True
12.True
S-12 chapter no.4
State true or false
1. It shall not be possible to insert the crank handle ( ) True

extracted from one group of points in the point
machine of any other group of points.
2. For cross protection of HR relay, UCR front contact is ( ) False
used.
3. On complete arrival of the train, SM normalized the ( ) True
signal knob but route not released due to one of the
back lock track failed, but SM reversed the gate
control knob and slot was sent to gate lodge with a
time delay 120 seconds to open the gate
4. For home signal DR to pick up, it is sufficient that ( ) False
main line starter DR is in pick up condition.
5. When economizer pushbutton is pressed to extract ( ) True
the crank handle, the lock coil is energized only after
dropping of CHLR.
6. When SM’s key is taken out, still it is possible to take ( ) False
off a signal from the panel.
7. In route setting type interlocking, when signal knob is ( ) False

reversed, the route setting relay
LR is energized to operate points to required
position.
8. In RRI, point knob has to be kept in ‘C’ position, for ( ) True

automatic operation of points.
118 | P a g e
9. In route setting panel interlocking with domino type ( ) True
panel with all buttons, two common point group
buttons are provided i.e. one for normal and other for
reverse
10. OVSR relay picks up automatically when run through ( ) True

signals are given and train cleared berthing track.
11. LC gate opening is possible without any time delay, ( ) False
after complete arrival of train but route not released.
12. In all buttons route setting type panel, the NNR drops ( ) True
the moment NRR picks up
13. One signal one train movement is achieved through ( ) True

TSR circuit
14. When SM locks the panel, RR dropping is prevented ( ) False

by SMCR front contact bridging the knob reverse
contact.
15. When signal is taken off the CHFR relay drops , ( ) True
thereby Crank handle is locked in the EKT can not be
taken out.
16. In ASR circuit indication, back & approach locking ( ) True
were proved.
17. For cancellation of a signal, JSLR picks up through its ( ) True
own ASR drop contact only after the signal knob is
normalized.
18. The track locking is proved in WLR circuit of a point. ( ) True
19. With the help of one front contact maximum three ( ) True
repeater relays can be energized
20. OVSR relay picks immediately when the train clears ( ) False
the back lock tracks , occupies berthing track and
stops at the foot of the starter.
21. UYRs are made slow to release because ASR picks up ( ) True
through UYRs up and UYRs pick up through ASR back
contact.
22. UCR front contact is proved in ASR so that ASR drops ( ) False
the moment route checking is completed.
23. When the train arrives on the berthing track and ( ) True
stops at the foot of the starter, the overlap
cancellation takes place automatically and OVSR picks
up after 2 minutes time delay.
24. The calling signal locks the main signal above it. ( ) True
119 | P a g e
25. when the signal is in taken off condition, if the SM ( ) False
turns LC gate controlling knob to reverse, then the
gate man can extract the LC gate key for the opening
the gate.
26. In route setting panel interlocking, NNR picks up ( ) True
through the back contact of NRR, the moment ALSR
picks up.
27. When the ASR (proved in point WLR cct) drops, the ( ) False
WLR still can pick up and point can be operated.
28. 28. The GECR relay remains in pickup when any one ( ) True
of the aspects is burning in the signal.
Chapter 4-KEY
1. True
2. False
3. True
4. False
5. True
6. False
7. False
8. True
9. True
10. True
11. False
12. True
13. True
14. False
15. True
16. True
17. True
18. True
19. True
20. False
21. True
22. False
23. True
24. True
25. False
26. True
27. False
28. True
120 | P a g e
Chapter no.1
STATE TRUE OR FALSE
1. Conflicting signal-to-signal ( True

)
locking is proved in at
least two stages.
2. In relay interlocking, the ( False
)
interlocking is checked at
UCR, ASR & HR stages.
3. The two types of relay ( True
)
interlocking are Non route
setting type and Route
setting type.
4. The two types of relay ( True
)
interlocking are panel
interlocking and RRI
5. The two types of ( False
)
interlocking are Non route
setting type interlocking &
panel interlocking.
6. The two types of ( False
)
interlocking are route
setting type interlocking
and RRI
7. Track indications on the ( True
)
panel when track is clear
and route set and locked
is white strip lights.
8. Track indication on the ( True
)
panel when track is
occupied or failed is red
9. Track indications on the ( False
)
121 | P a g e
panel when the track is
clear and route set locked
is yellow strip lights (LEDs)
10 Track indications on the ( False
)
. panel when the track is
clear and route set &
locked is green strip lights
(LEDs)
11 when no route is set and ( True
)
. no track failed the
indications on the panel
for tracks is blank.
Chapter no.1 key
1. True
2. False
3. True
4. True
5. False
6. False
7. True
8. True
9. False
10. False
11. True
S-12 CHAPTER 2
122 | P a g e
STATE TRUE OR FALSE
1. Point knobs used in RRI are of 3 ( ) True

position type.
2. In route setting type inter locking ( ) False

points are to be operated to correct
position before signal is taken off.
3. Non route setting type / panel ( ) True
interlocking the points are to be
operated manually before clearing
the signal.
4. When UCR picks up , ASR ( ) True
concerned will be dropped either in
PI or in RRI.
5. The points will be set automatically ( ) True
in RRI when signal button and route
button are pressed simultaneously.
6. In panel interlocking LR relay sets ( ) False
all the relevant points to the
correct position automatically.
7. The point switches used in route ( ) True
setting type inter locking will have
three positions i.e. N, C and R.
8. For automatic operation of points ( ) True

in RRI , the point knob has to be set
to centre ( C ) position.
9. When the point switch 3 positions ( ) True

is kept in the centre
( C) position then both NC & RC
switch contacts are made to
facilitate automatic point
operation.
123 | P a g e
Chapter 2 Key
1.True
2.False
3. True
4. True
5. True
6. False
7. True
8. True
9. True
S-15,16
Siemens question banks
Select the choice

1. For initiation of signal ------- letter is used in Siemens concept ( ) A) Z
A) Z B) Z1
C) Z2 D) none
2. For overlap setting relay the -------letter is used in Siemens concept ( ) A) Z2
A) Z 2 B) U C) R D) none
3. For straight line route section the--- letter is used in Siemens concept ( ) D) none
A) Z 2 B) U C) R D) none
4. for first diversion route section the ----- letter is used in Siemens concept ( ) C) B
A) Z 2 B) U C) B D) none
5. For second diversion route section the ----- letter is used in Siemens concept ( ) B) C
A) D B) C C) B D) A
124 | P a g e
6. For any BUTTON the ----- letter is used in Siemens concept ( ) C) N
A) U B) G C) N D) W
7. For any signal button relay the ----- letters are used in Siemens concept ( ) A) GN
A) GN B) GNR C) NR D) SR
8. For common point button the ----- letters are used in Siemens concept ( ) A) WWN
A) WWN B) WWWN C) W NR D)
WWNR
9. For emergency point button the ----- letters are used in Siemens concept ( ) A) EWN
A) EWN B) WWWN C) W NR
D) WWNR
10. For emergency point button relay the ----- letters are used in Siemens concept ( ) C)EWNR
A) EWN B) WWWNR C) EW NR D)
WWNR
11. UNR means -------------- ( ) A) route

A) route button relay B) route checking relay C) route locking relay button relay
D) under normal relay E) none
12. GNCR means------------------- ( )

A) Signal button relay B) signal button checking relay C) signal Checking
relay D) gate normal checking relay E) none
13. UNCR means-------- ( ) D) Route

A) Route button relay B) route checking relay C) route locking relay button
D) Route button checking relay E) none checking relay
14. WNCR means ---------- ( ) D) Point button

A) Point button relay B) point checking relay C) point locking rela checking relay
D) Point button checking relay E) none
125 | P a g e
15. UECR means --------- ( ) D) Route lamp
A) Route button relay B) route checking relay C) lamp checking relay checking relay
D) Route lamp checking relay E) none
16. EUUYN cancellation is registered by --------- counter ( ) C) EUUYZ
A) EUYZ B) BUUYZ C) EUUYZ D) EUYYZ
17. Key is provided for ---------button. ( ) C) EUYN
A) EUYZ B) EUYYN C) EUYN D) EWNZ
18. Seal arrangement is provided for ---------- ( ) C) EUYN &EWN

A) EUYZ &EWN B) EUUYN &EWN C) EUYN &EWN
D) None
19. Written memo by on duty SM/ASM to S&T staff is compulsory before operation of ( ) C) EUYN
---------
A) GN B) EUUYN C) EUYN D) UN
20. In new installation EUYN key is provided ----------- ( ) D) inside panel

A) On top of panel B) on left side C) on right side D) desk
inside panel desk E) In relay room
21. EWN operation can be done when ----------------- ( ) D) route is not

A) Route is not set, pt TPR’s up B) route is set, pt TPR’sup set, pt TPR’s
C) Route is set, pt TPR’s down D) route is not set,TPR’s down
down
E) None
22. WWN operation is possible when route is not set & TPR’s are down. State ( ) C) false
true/false
A) May be false B) true C) false D) cannot declare E)
none
23. EWN & WWN simultaneous command is possible at a time. ( ) B) false

A) May be false B) false C) true D) cannot declare E)
none
126 | P a g e
24. WN & EWN simultaneous command is possible at a time when route is not set & ( ) C) true
TPR’s are down.
A) May be false B) false C) true D) can not declare E)
none
25. WWN & WN simultaneous command is possible at a time when route is not set ( ) B) false
& TPR’s are down.
A) May be false B) false C) true D) cannot declare
E) none
26 Two GN buttons operation simultaneously is possible because SM key is not ( ) C) true

Proved
A) May be false B) false C) true D) cannot declare E)
none
27. GNR can be picking up by making SM key out ( )

A) May be true B) false C) true D) cannot declare
E) none
28 GNPR can not pick when SM key is out ( ) B) false

E) none
29 GNR can not pick when SM key is out. ( ) B) false

E) none
30. UNR can pick when SM key is out. ( ) B) false

E) none
31. -------- GNCR is/are provided for one lay out. ( ) A) one
A) one B) two C) three D) four E) none
32. -------- UNCR is/are provided for one lay out. ( )

A) one B) two C) three D) four E) none A) one
33 -------- MnGNPR is/are provided for one lay out . ( ) A) one

127 | P a g e
34 -------- ShGNPR is/are provided for one lay out . ( ) A) one
35 -------- MnGzR is/are provided for one lay out . ( ) A) one

36 -------- ShGzR is/are provided for one lay out . ( ) A) one

37 -------- ZDUCR is/are provided for one lay out . ( ) A) one

38 Z1UR is provided for each ------------------ ( )

A) berthing potion B) route section C)
subroute D) signal group E) Route group
39 GNPR is provided for each ------------------ ( ) E) none

A) Route group B) route section C) subroute
D) signal group E) none
40 UNPR is provided for each ------------------ ( ) E) none

A) berthing potion B) route section C) subroute
D) signal group E) None
41 GNCR works for------------------- A) main signal ( ) C) main and

button B)shunt signal button shunt signal
C) main and shunt sign D)route sections buttons
E) none
42 UNCR works for------------------- ( ) E) none

A) main signals B)shunt signals C) main
and shunt signals D)route sections E) none
43 GNCR drops when ------------------ is pressed. ( ) C) GN

A) UN B) BN C) GN D) WN E) None
44 UNCR drops when ------------------ is pressed. ( ) A) UN

45 WNCR drops when ------------------ is pressed. A) UN ( ) D) WN

B) BN C) GN D) WN E) None
128 | P a g e
46 MnGNPR drops when ------------------ is pressed. ( ) C) GN
47 MnGZR picks up when ------------------ is pressed. ( ) B) GN+UN

A) GN B) GN+UN C) GN +WN D) WN +WWN E) None
48 ZDUCR picks up when ------------------ is pressed. ( ) B) GN+UN

A) GN B) GN+UN C) GN +WN D) WN +WWN E)
None
49 Z1UR picks up when ------------------ is pressed. ( ) B) GN+UN

A) GN B) GN+UN C) GN +WN D) WN +WWN E)
None
50 Energization of MnGZR proves ------------------------------ A) main ( ) B) only main
point is initiated B) only main signal is initiated signal is
C) main and shunt signal are initiated D) main or shunt signal is initiated
initiated E) only shunt signal is initiated
51 Energization of ShGZR proves ------------------------------ ( ) E) only shunt

A) main point is initiated B) only main signal is initiated signal is
C) main and shunt signal are initiated D) main or shunt signal is initiated
initiated E) only shunt signal is initiated
52 Energization of ZDUCR proves ---------------------- ( ) D) main or

A) main point is initiated B) only main signal is shunt signal is
initiated C) main and shunt signal are initiated initiated
D) main or shunt signal is initiated E) only shunt signal is
initiated
53 direction relay is named as per --------------------------- ( ) C) berthing
A) top point B) point track C) berthing track ckt track ckt
D) signal E) none
54 Z1UR is named asper ------------------- ( ) B) subroute

A) top point/ B) subroute name C) berthing track ckt name
D) route section E) none
55 sub route is named asper -------------------- ( ) D) Top point or

A) Z1UR B) Top point C) signal number D) Top signal number
point or signal number E) track ckt
129 | P a g e
56 route section is named as per ---------------- ( ) B) subroute
A) top point B) subroute name C) berthing track ckt D) signal name
E) none
57 WN+WWN operation leads to -------------- when point zone TPR’s are up ( )

A) point operation B) TPR’s up C) EWNR to A) point
pick up D)TPR’s to drop E) none operation
58 WN+EWN operation leads to ------------- when point zone TPR’s are drop ( )
A) point operation B) TPR’s up C) WWNR to pick up A) point
D)TPR’s to drop E) none operation
59 WWN+EWN operation leads to ------------- when point zone TPR’s are drop ( ) E) none
A) point operation B) TPR’s up C) WWNR to pick up
D)TPR’s to drop E) none
60 UN+GN operation leads to ------------- A) signal ( ) A) signal

clearance B) TPR’s up C) WWNR to pick up clearance
D)TPR’s to drop E) none
Siemens relays
1 Siemens relays other name is ------------- ( A
130 | P a g e
A) k-50 B) k-60 C) k-59 D) k-69 E) ) )
none k
-
5
0
2 Siemens relays specification is (
A) IRS S46-76 B) IRS S47-76 C) IRS ) A
S46-77 D) IRS S76-46 E) None )
I
R
S
S
4
6
-
7
6
3 Siemens relays are ------------------------- type ( B
A) Dependant B) independent C) ) )
separate D) twin i
E) none n
d
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
4 Siemens relays are --------------------- typ (
A) double make double break ) A
B)spring C)contact )
D) welding E)none d
o
u
b
l
131 | P a g e
e
m
a
k
e
d
o
u
b
l
e
b
r
e
a
k
5 In Siemens relays there is ( C
no---------------------------contact ) )
A) Front B) back C) arm D) a
metal E) none r
m
6 in Siemens relays -----------pins are provided to ( D

prevent invert plugging ) )
A) wide B)side C)hide D) g
guide E)none u
i
d
e
7 --------------- action in Siemens relays is self ( D
cleaning. ) )
A) Ripping B) fast C) slow D) w
wiping E) none i
p
i
n
g
132 | P a g e
8 Pick up time in Siemens relays is ------------------- ( D
A) 5ms B) 75-80ms C) 15- ) )
20ms D) 25-60ms E) none 2
5
-
6
0
m
s
9 Drop away time in Siemens relays is ( C
------------------ ) )
A) 2-5ms B) 5-6ms C) 7-15ms 7
D) 25-60ms E) none -
1
5
m
s
10 In Siemens neutral type relays (
-------------combination is available )
A) 12f/4b B) 6f/2b C) 8f/8b
D) 2f/6b E) none
11 6f/2b,4f/4b combinations are available in ( E
Siemens ------------------- ) )
A) ACI type B) ECR type C) clock type n
D) D type E)none o
n
e
12 In Siemens ACI type only -------- type is ( B
available ) )
A) 6f/2b B)5f/3b C) 4f/4b 5
D)8f/8b E)none f
/
3
b
13 In interlocked Siemens relays ( D
-------------combinations art available ) )
A) 6f/2b B) 4f/4b a
133 | P a g e
C) 5f/3b D) all given in A, B, C ll
option E) none g
i
v
e
n
i
n
A
,
B
,
C
o
p
ti
o
n
14 In interlocked relay –---no contact is used as ( B
economizer contact ) )
A) 11 B) 12 C) 13 D) 14 E) 1
none 2
15 In interlocked type ------------- arrangement is ( A

provided to keep relay in pick up condition ) )
A) Mechanical B) electrical M
C) electronic D) dynamic e
E) none c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
16 Interlocked relay is used for -------------------- ( A
circuit. ) )
134 | P a g e
A) Conflicting B) series C
C) parallel D) indication o
E) none n
fl
i
c
ti
n
g
17 in interlocked type relays ------------coil is ( A
energized condition normally ) )
A) top B) side C) up D) bottom t
E) none o
p
18 In interlocked type relays ------------coil is de (
energized condition normally ) C
A) Normal B) side C) reverse D) )
bottom E) none r
e
v
e
r
s
e
19 ON ECR is used for --------------aspect ( C
A) yellow B) green C) red ) )
D)white E)none r
e
d
20 OFF ECR is used for ----------------aspect. ( A
A) Yellow B) red C) blue D) ) )
on E) none Y
e
ll
o
w
21 ON ECR contact combination is ------------- ( D

135 | P a g e
A) 6f/2b B)4f/4b C)5f/3b ) )
D)3f/3b E) none 3
f
/
3
b
22 OFF ECR contact combination is ----- ( D
A) 6f/2b B) 4f/4b C) 5f/3b D) ) )
3f/3b E) none 3
f
/
3
b
23 UECR contact combination is ----- ( C
A) 6f/2b B) 4f/4b C) 5f/1b D) ) )
3f/3b E) none 5
f
/
1
b
24 UECR is used for --------------aspect ( D
A) Yellow B) green C) red D) ) )
route E) none r
o
u
t
e
25 -----------pin combination is provided in Siemens ( D
relays to prevent ) )
plugging of wrong relays c
A) guide B) non magnetic C) o
residual D)coding E) none d
i
n
g
26 in 5f/3b contact combination ---is back contact ( E
A) 11 B) 12 C) 13 D)14 ) )
136 | P a g e
E)15 1
5
27 in 5f/3b contact combination ---is back contact ( D
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 ) )
E)11 4
A) 11 B) 12 C) 3 D)14 ) )
E)none n
o
n
e
A) 11 B) 12 C) 13 D)14 ) )
E)15 1
5
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 ) )
E) 5 5
DOMINO AND CONTROLPANEL

1 size of domino available in Siemens concept are ( A
A)63mmx38mm B)83mmx68mm ) )
C) 45mmx34mm D) 54mmx38mm 6
E) none 3
m
m
x
3
8
m
m
2 compartments given in domino are --------- ( E

137 | P a g e
A) 11 B) 12 C) 13 D)14 ) )
E)15 1
5
3 terminals provided in domino are ------- (
A) 12 B)14 C)16 D)18 E) )
none
4 -------- terminal carries neg of indication ckt ( C

A) 3&8 B)8&13 C)16 D)15 ) )
E) none 1
6
5 common aluminum plate is connected to (
terminal------- )
A) 3&8 B)8&13 C)16 D)15 E)
none
6 Arrangement of common aluminum plate is ( C

such that ----------------- ) )
Will definitely touches to common plate. c
A) Indication bulb B) button a
assembly C) cap of p
indication bul D) Neg o
E) none f
i
n
d
i
c
a
ti
o
n
b
u
l
7 Button assembly can be provided in ( A
compartments-------&-------- ) )
A) 3&8 B)6&7 C)7&8 D) 8&9 3
138 | P a g e
E)none &
8
8 Point locking indication can be given in ( B
compartment----- ) )
A) 3 B) 8 C) 13 D) 3&13 8
E) none
9 Track indication when TPR’s are in drop ( B

condition is given in---&---- ) )
A) 6&10 B)7&9 C)6&9 D)7&10 7
E)none &
9
10 Track indication when TPR’s are in pick up ( A
condition is given in---&---- ) )
A) 6&10 B)7&9 C)6&9 6
D)7&10 E)none &
1
0
11 top plate is combination of --------- plates ( C
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E)none ) )
3
12 upper plate of top plate is of ------------- ( C

A) copper B) brass C) steel D) ) )
aluminum E) none s
t
e
e
l
13 Location of compartment is given by-------- ( C
A) CR B)CRC C)CCR D) CRR ) )
E)none C
C
R
14 on panel desk, on track drawing ----&----- ( A
buttons are provided ) )
A) GN&UN B)GN&WN C) G
WN&WWN D)SHGN&WN E) N
139 | P a g e
NONE &
U
N
15 indication of ON aspect of any signal is given in ( A

-----or------- Buttons ) )
A) 3 or 13 B)3 or 8 C) 8 or 13 D) 3
3&8 E)none o
r
1
3
16 colour of GN button is ------- ( B) red
A) yellow B) red )
C) blue D) blue with white
dot E)grey
17 colour of UN button is ------- ( E)gre
A) yellow B) red ) y
C) blue D) blue with white dot
E)grey
18 colour of WN button is ------- ( C)
A) yellow B) red ) blue
E)grey
19 colour of WWN button is ------- ( C)
E)grey
20 colour of EGGN button is ------- ( B) red
A) yellow B) red )
E)grey
21 colour of EUUYN button is ------- (
A) yellow B) red ) E)gre
C) blue D) blue with white dot y
E)grey
22 colour of EUYN button is ------- ( D)
140 | P a g e
C) blue D) blue with white dot with
E)grey white
dot
23 colour of SHGN button is ------- ( A)
A) yellow B) red ) yello
C) blue D) blue with white dot w
E)grey
24 colour of YYN button is ------- (

A) yellow B) red ) E
C) blue D) blue with white dot )
E)grey g
r
e
y
25 colour of YRN button is ------- ( E)

A) yellow B) red ) gr
C) blue D) blue with white dot ey
E)grey
26 colour of OYN button is ------- ( E)grey
A) yellow B) red )
E)grey
27 colour of CHYN button is ------- ( E
A) yellow B) red ) )
C) blue D) blue with white dot g
E)green r
e
e
n
28 colour of LXN button is ------- ( E)grey

A) yellow B) red )
E)grey
29 colour of WN button( with subroute ( D) blue
cancellation facility) is ------- ) with
141 | P a g e
A) yellow B) red white
C) blue D) blue with white dot dot
E)grey
30 colour of EWN button is ------- ( C) blue
A) yellow B) red )
E)grey
31 Sealing arrangement is provided for -------------- ( A
A) EWN B) EUYYN C)EGGN D) ) )
OYN E)none E
W
N
32 full route cancellation is done by------- ( E

OYN E)none n
o
n
e
33 sub route cancellation is done by------- ( E
OYN E)EUYN E
U
Y
N
34 full route cancellation counter is ----------- ( C
A) EUYZ B)EUYYZ C)EUUYZ ) )
D)EEUYZ E)EWZ E
U
U
Y
Z
35 Subroute cancellation counter is ----------- ( A
A) EUYZ B)EUYYZ C)EUUYZ ) )
D)EEUYZ E)EWZ E
U
Y
142 | P a g e
Z
36 overlap cancellation counter is ----------- ( D
A) EUYZ B)EUYYZ C)EUUYZ D)OYZ ) )
E)EWZ O
Y
Z
37 Calling on clearance counter is ----------- ( D
A) EUYZ B)EUYYZ C)EUUYZ D)COGGZ ) )
E)EWZ C
O
G
G
Z
38 emergency point operation counter is ----------- ( E
A) EUYZ B)EUYYZ C)EUUYZ D)EEUYZ ) )
E)EWZ E
W
Z
39 key interlocking is provided to ------------- ( E
A) EWN B) EUYYN C)EGGN D) OYN ) )
E)EUYN E
U
Y
N
40 EUYN operation can be done by--------- ( C
A) ESM III B)ESM II ) )
C)ESM I D) Helper khalashi E) E
none S
M
I
143 | P a g e
Relay rack and arrangement
1. color of wire of Amphenol pin 1 is----- ( A

A)blue B) red C)grey ) )
D)green E)none b
l
u
e
2. color of wire of Amphenol pin 2is----- ( A
D)green E)none b
l
u
e
3. color of wire of Amphenol pin 3is----- ( A
D)green E)none b
l
u
e
D)green E)none b
l
u
e
5. color of wire of Amphenol pin 11 is----- ( B
144 | P a g e
D)green E)none r
e
d
D)green E)none r
e
d
D)green E)none r
e
d
D)green E)none r
e
d
9. color of wire of Amphenol pin 21 is----- ( C
D)green E)none g
r
e
y
10. color of wire of Amphenol pin 31 is----- ( D
D)green E)none g
r
e
e
n
D)green E)none g
r
e
e
145 | P a g e
n
D)green E)none g
r
e
e
n
D)green E)none g
r
e
e
n
14. color of wire of Amphenol pin 41 is----- ( E
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
146 | P a g e
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
D)green E)none n
o
n
e
A)brown B) black C)yellow ) )
D)white E)none y
e
ll
147 | P a g e
o
w

D)white E)none y
e
ll
o
w

D)white E)none y
e
ll
o
w

D)white E)none y
e
ll
o
w

D)white E)none w
h
it
e
D)white E)none w
h
it
148 | P a g e
e
29. color of wire of Amphenol pin 73is----- ( D
D)white E)none w
h
it
e
D)white E)none w
h
it
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
149 | P a g e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
A) brown B) black C)yellow ) )
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
A) pink B) black C) purple ) )
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
150 | P a g e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
42. color of wire of Amphenol pin 2is----- ( E
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
151 | P a g e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
152 | P a g e
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
153 | P a g e
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
61. color of wire of Amphenol pin 51is----- ( B
D)white E)none b
l
a
c
k
D)white E)none b
l
a
c
k
D)white E)none b
l
a
c
k
64. color of wire of Amphenol pin 54is----- ( B
D)white E)none b
l
a
c
k
154 | P a g e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)white E)none n
o
n
e
D)blue E)none p
i
n
k
D)blue E)none p
i
n
k
71. in Siemens relay ,continuity of contact ------ is ( B
available in between Amphenol terminal 11 ) )
155 | P a g e
&12 0
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.01 2
D)04.01 E)none .
0
1
72. in Siemens relay ,continuity of contact ------ is ( C
&22 0
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.01 3
D)04.01 E)none .
0
1
73. in Siemens relay ,continuity of contact ------ is ( D
&32 0
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.01 4
D)04.01 E)none .
0
1
74. in Siemens relay ,continuity of contact ------ is ( E
&42 n
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.01 o
D)04.01 E)none n
e
&52 n
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.01 o
D)04.01 E)none n
e
&62 n
A) 05.02 B) 15.02 C)03.01 o
D)04.01 E)none n
e
156 | P a g e
77. in Siemens relay ,continuity of contact ------ is ( A
&72 1
A) 13.01 B) 14.01 C)03.01 3
D)04.01 E)none .
0
1
&82 n
A) 13.01 B) 14.01 C)03.01 o
D)04.01 E)none n
e
&92 n
A) 13.01 B) 14.01 C)03.01 o
D)11.02 E)none n
e
&14 n
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.01 o
D)04.01 E)none n
e
&24 0
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.02 3
D)04.01 E)none .
0
2
&34 0
A) 01.01 B) 02.01 C)03.01 4
D)04.02 E)none .
157 | P a g e
0
2
&44 0
A) 01.01 B) 05.02 C)03.02 5
D)04.02 E)none .
0
2
84. in Siemens relay ,continuity of contact ------ is (
available in between Amphenol terminal 53 )
&54
A) 15.02 B) 05.02 C)03.02
D)04.02 E)none
available in between Amphenol terminal 63 & ) )
64 1
A) 15.02 B) 14.02 C) 13..02 4
D) 11.02 E)none .
0
2
74 1
A) 15.02 B) 14.02 C) 13..02 D) 3
11.02 E)none ..
0
2
84 n
A) 15.02 B) 14.02 C) 13..02 D) o
11.02 E)none n
e
94 1
158 | P a g e
A) 15.02 B) 14.02 C) 13..02 D) 1
11.02 E)none .
0
2
available in between Amphenol ) )
terminal 93 & 94 n
A) 15.02 B) 14.02 C) 13..02 D) o
11.01 E)none n
e
84 1
A) 15.02 B) 14.02 C) 13..02 D) 2
12.02 E)none .
0
2
91. 160 pin tag block can accommodate ( D
----------mini groups ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D)4 E)none 4
92. 200 pin tag block can accommodate ( E
----------mini groups ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D)4 E)none n
o
n
e
93. 160 pin tag block can accommodate ( E
----------minor groups ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D)4 E)none n
o
n
e
94. 200 pin tag block can accommodate ( B
----------minor groups ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D)4 E)none 2
159 | P a g e
95. 200 pin tag block can accommodate ( A
----------major groups ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D)4 E)none 1
96. one ‘G’ type fuse block can accommodate ( D

-------fuses. ) )
A) 91 B) 93 C) 95 D) 96 E)none 9
6
97. in one ‘G’ type max fuse strip -----fuses are (
available )
98. one relay rack can accommodate ---------mini ( B

groups ) )
A)16 B) 64 C) 8 D) 8x2 E) none 6
4
99. one relay rack can accommodate ---------minor ( A
groups ) )
A)16 B) 64 C) 8 D) 8x8 E) none 1
6
100. one relay rack can accommodate ---------major ( C
groups ) )
A)16 B) 64 C) 8 D) 8x2 E) none 8
101. one relay rack can accommodate ---------major ( A
groups ) )
A)2x4 B) 2x8 C) 8x8 D) 4x2 E) none 2
x
4
102. one relay rack can accommodate ---------minor (
groups ) D
A)2x4 B) 2x8 C) 8x8 D) 4x4 E) none )
4
x
4
103. one relay rack can accommodate ---------mini ( C
groups A)2x4 B) 2x8 C) 8x8 D) 4x4 ) )
E) none 8
x
8
160 | P a g e
104. relay space provided in mini group is---------- ( A
A) 2 B) 15 C) 30 D) 1 E) none ) )
2
105. relay space provided in minor group is---------- ( B
A) 2 B) 15 C) 30 D) 1 E) none ) )
1
5
106. relay space provided in major group is---------- ( C
A) 2 B) 15 C) 30 D) 23+1 E) none ) )
3
0
107. relay space provided in point minor group ( B
is----------A) 2 B) 15 C) 30 D) 11+1 ) )
E) none 1
5
108. relay space provided in signal minor group ( B
is---------- ) )
A) 2 B) 15 C) 30 D) 11+1 E) none 1
5
109. relay space provided in shunt minor group ( B
is----------A) 13 B) 15 C) 30 D) 11+1 ) )
E) none 1
5
110. relay space provided in route minor group ( B
is---------- ) )
A) 13 B) 15 C) 11 D) 11+1 E) none 1
5
111. relays provided in point minor group are-------- ( D
A) 2 B) 15 C) 30 D) 11+1 E) ) )
none 1
1
+
1
112. relays provided in 2A signal minor group are ( E
---------- A) 13 B) 15 C) 30 D) ) )
11+1 E)none n
o
161 | P a g e
n
e
113. relays provided in 3A signal minor group are ( A
---------- ) )
A) 13 B) 15 C) 30 D) 11+1 E) none 1
3
114. relays provided in point major group ----------- ( C
A) 30 B)15 C) 23+1 D) 11+1 E) none ) )
2
3
+
1
115. relays provided in point chain group ----------- (
A) 8 B)15 C) 23+1 D) 11+1 E) none ) A
)
8
116. indications provided on 2A signal minor group ( B
are ----------- ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E) none 2
117. indications provided on 3A signal minor group ( B
are ----------- ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E) none 2
118. indications provided on point minor group are ( A
----------- ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E) none 1
119. indications provided on point major group are ( C
----------- ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E) none 3
120. indications provided on route minor group are ( B
----------- ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E) none 2
121. indications provided on shunt signal minor ( D
group are ----------- ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E) none 4
122. indications provided on point chain group are ( E
----------- ) )
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 E) none n
162 | P a g e
o
n
e
123. indications provided on 2A signal minor group ( A
are ----------- ) )
A) RKE,DKE B) REK.DK C) RKE R
D) HKE E) none K
E
,
D
K
E
124. indications provided on 3A signal minor group ( A
are ----------- ) )
D) HKE E) none K
E
,
D
K
E
125. indications provided on POINT minor group ( C
are ----------- ) )
D) HKE E) none K
E
126. indications provided on point major group are ( E
----------- ) )
A) RKE,DKE B) REK.DK C) RKE n
D) HKE E) none o
n
e
127. indications provided on shunt signal minor ( B
group are ----------- ) )
A) RKE,DKE B) RKE,HKE ,RKE,HKE R
C) RKE D) HKE K
E) none E
163 | P a g e
,
H
K
E
,
R
K
E
,
H
K
E
128. indications provided on point chain group are ( E
----------- ) )
A) RKE,DKE B) RKE,HKE ,RKE,HKE n
C) RKE D) HKE o
E) none n
e
129. indications provided on route minor group are ( A
----------- ) )
A) RKE,HKE B) RKE,HKE ,RKE,HKE R
C) RKE D) HKE K
E) none E
,
H
K
E
130. indications provided on mini group are (
----------- ) E
A) RKE,DKE B) RKE,HKE ,RKE,HKE )
C) RKE D) HKE n
E) none o
n
e
131. MDF means-------------- ( C
A)main distribution fuse B) main distant ) )
frame m
164 | P a g e
C) main distribution frame D) main distant a
fuse i
E) none n
d
i
s
t
ri
b
u
ti
o
n
f
r
a
m
e
132. IDF means-------------- ( C
A) Intermediate distribution fuse ) )
B) Intermediate distant frame I
C) Intermediate distribution frame n
D) main distribution frame t
E) none e
r
m
e
d
i
a
t
e
d
i
s
t
ri
165 | P a g e
b
u
ti
o
n
f
r
a
m
e
133. MDF is provided in ---------- ( B
A) big yards B)small yards C)mid ) )
sections D) IBS E) none s
m
a
ll
y
a
r
d
s
134. IDF is provided in ---------- ( A
A) big yards B)small yards C)mid ) )
sections D) IBS E) none b
i
g
y
a
r
d
s
135. In IDF tag block provided on one pillar are------- ( D
A) 4 B) 6 C) 8 D) 10 E) none ) )
1
0
136. wiring from domino to panel desk tag block is ( B
done with ) )
166 | P a g e
A) 0.4mm dia indoor cable 0
B) 0.4mm dia jumper wire .
C) 0.6mm dia indoor cable 4
D) 0.6mm dia jumper wire m
E) none m
d
i
a
j
u
m
p
e
r
w
ir
e
137. wiring from panel desk tag block to IDF is done ( C
with ) )
E) none m
d
i
a
i
n
d
o
o
r
c
a
b
167 | P a g e
l
e
138. wiring from tag block IDF to relay base plate is ( C
done with ) )
A) 0.4mm dia indoor cable B) 0.4mm dia 0
jumper wire .
C) 0.6mm dia indoor cable D) 0.6mm dia 6
jumper wire E) none m
m
d
i
a
i
n
d
o
o
r
c
a
b
l
e
139. wiring from tag block IDF to tag block IDF is ( D
done with ) )
E) none m
d
i
a
j
u
m
168 | P a g e
p
e
r
w
ir
e
140. wiring from tag block IDF to CT -- rack is done ( D
with ) )
E) none m
d
i
a
j
u
m
p
e
r
w
ir
e
141. wiring from tag block IDF to CT - rack for point ( E
controlling ckt is done with ) )
A) 0.4mm dia indoor cable n
B) 0.4mm dia jumper wire o
C) 0.6mm dia indoor cable n
D) 0.6mm dia jumper wire e
E) none
142. wiring from tag block IDF to CT - rack for sig ( E
lamp checking ckt is done with ) )
A) 0.4mm dia indoor cable n
B) 0.4mm dia jumper wire o
169 | P a g e
C) 0.6mm dia indoor cable n
D) 0.6mm dia jumper wire e
E) none
143. On one terminal of tag block soldering of ( B
--------wires are allowed. ) )
A) 1 B)2 C) 3 D)4 E) none 2
144. Inter distance between two racks should not ( A
be less than ---------- ) )
A) 1m B) 2m C) 3m D) 4m E) 1
none m
145. distance between roof and top surface of rack ( D

should not be less than --- ) )
A) 1m B) 1.25m C) 1.35m D) 1.5m 1
E) none .
5
m
146. distance between side wall and rack should not ( D

be less than --- ) )
A) 1m B) 1.25m C) 1.35m D) 1.5m 1
E) none .
5
m
147. distance between parallel wall and relay row ( D

should not be less than --- ) )
A) 1m B) 1.25m C) 1.35m D) 1.5m 1
E) none .
5
m
148. distance between IDF and relay rack should ( C

not be less than --- ) )
A) 1m B) 1.25m C) 1.35m D) 1.5m 1
E) none .
3
5
170 | P a g e
m
149. in panel desk --------tag pin is used normally ( C

A)69 B) 160 C) 96 D) 40 E) ) )
none 9
6
150. point locking relay-------- ( A
) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
151. signal locking relay ( B

) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
152. route locking relay ( E
) )
n
A) B) C) D) o
n
e
E) none
153. route locking interlocked relay coil ------------ ( E
) )
n
A) B) C) D) o
n
e
E) none
154. interlocked relay normal coil front contact ----- ( E
171 | P a g e
) )
n
A) B) C) D) o
n
e
E) none
155. interlocked relay reverse coil back contact------ ( B
) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
156. neutral relay front contact------- ( E
) )
A) B) C) D) n
o
n
e
E) none
157. neutral relay back contact------- ( A
) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
158. route checking relay ( A

) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
172 | P a g e
159. route controlling relay ( E
) )
n
A) B) C) D) o
n
e
E) none
160. signal controlling relay ( E
) )
A) B) C) D) n
o
n
e
E) none
161. point contactor relay ( B
) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
162. point time relay ( E
) )
T
n
A) B) C) D) o
n
e
E) none
173 | P a g e
163. track relay---- ( A
) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
164. point neutral locking relay-------- ( B

) )
A) B) C) D)
E) none
165. signal indication neutral relay------- ( E
) )
A) B) C) D) n
o
n
e
E) none
166. track repeater relay------ ( E
) )
n
A) B) C) D) o
n
e
E) none
167. in k-50 relays ------is always front contact ( D
)
A) 01 B) 11 C) 15 D) 02 ) 0
E) none 2
168. in k-50 relays ------is always front contact ( C
174 | P a g e
A) 01 B) 11 C) 12 D) 05 ) )
E) none 1
2
169. in k-50 relays ------is always back contact ( D
(except ECRs) ) )
A) 01 B) 11 C) 12 D) 05 0
E) none 5
170. in k-50 relays ------is always back contact ( D
(except ECRs) ) )
A) 01 B) 11 C) 12 D) 15 1
E) none 5
************************************************************************
*******
CHAPTER 1
STATE TRUE or FALSE
(
1. In case of Electronic Interlocking System, (
)
Non-Interlocking period is less T
)
(
2. In case of Electronic Interlocking System, (
)
Standard of safety and reliability is higher as T
compared with existing relay interlocking )
175 | P a g e
systems.
(
3. Datalogger / Event logger is not an integral (
)
part of EI. F
)
(
4. Electronic Interlocking System is provided (
)
with self-diagnostic in feature. T
)
(
5. By using Object Controllers Main signalling (
)
cables between Equipment Room (Relay T
Room) and Location Box of field functions )
can be eliminated.
(
6. Microlok-II is a Dual hardware with software (
)
diversity system. F
)
(
7. SIMIS S Electronic interlocking system is a 2 (
)
out of 3 system. F
)
(
8. In Electronic interlocking system, executive (
)
software is common to all EI’s of same T
company manufacturing the same model. )

(
9. In Electronic interlocking system, executive (
)
software cuts off vital supply voltage to T
output relays, in case of unsafe failures. )
176 | P a g e
(
10. In Electronic interlocking system, (
)
application software is specific to each T
station. )
CHAPTER 2
STATE TRUE or FALSE
(
1. Microlok -II is a 2 out of 3 system. (
)
F
)
(
2. In MICROLOK-II, Application software is (
)
common for all stations. F
)
(
3. In MICROLOK-II, Executive software is (
)
common for all stations. T
)
(
4. Microlok-II system is limited to 4-road (
)
station only. F
)
(
5. In Microlok II, each card file capacity is 20 (
)
slots. T
177 | P a g e
(
6. Non-Vital I/O cards are required in (
)
Microlok-II system only when the system is T
required to be interface with conventional )
Control cum Indication Panel.

(
7. In Microlok-II system RS-485 ports are used (
)
for vital interface. T
)
(
8. In Microlok-II system RS-232 ports are used (
)
for Non-Vital data interface. T
)
(
9. In Microlok-II card file, maximum 20 nos. of (
)
Input / Output interface cards can be F
accommodated. )
(
10. In Microlok-II card file, CPU card occupies (
)
the space of 2 slots. T
)
(
11. In Microlok-II card file, Power supply card (
)
occupies the space of 1 slot. F
)
(
12. In Microlok-II CPU card is provided with (
)
FLASH ROMs / EEPROMs for storing the T
executive and application software. )
178 | P a g e
(
13. In Microlok-II, each address select PCB (
)
consists of 8 nos. of Jumpers. F
)
(
14. In Microlok-II, each address select PCB (
)
jumper settings are unique and shall match T
with the definition of cards in application )
program.
(
15. In Microlok-II card file, keying plugs (
)
prevents plugging of wrong type of card. T
(
16. In Microlok-II, address select PCB is used to (
)
address particular slot of the card file. T
)
(
17. The EEPROM PCB is placed on the 48 Pin (
)
connector of the CPU card to store Site- T
specific configuration data. )
(
18. Microlok II can be used as a Distributed (
)
Interlocking System. T
)
(
19. Main Signalling Cable can be totally (
)
eliminated with Microlok-II as a Distributed T
Interlocking System. )
179 | P a g e
(
20. For a 4-road station with Microlok-II as a (
)
Distributed Interlocking is costlier over F
Microlok-II as a Centralised Interlocking )
system.
MULTIPLE CHOICE:
VCOR Relay has _____ _____ contacts. ( )

1. C
A) 8F/B B) 4F/B C) 6F/B D) )
2F/B 6
B
VCOR Relay contact current rating is____ Amp ( )
2. B
A) 1A B) 3A C) 5A D) 50mA )
A
In Microlok-II CPU card is provided with ______________ ( )
3. C
processor.
)
A) 68000 B) 8086 C) 68332 6
D)Intel Pentium 8
180 | P a g e
2
In Microlok-II system, CPU card is provided with ______ ( )
4. B
no. of ports.
)
A)4 serial and 1 parallel 5

B) 5 serial
C) 4 parallel and 1 serial
D) 5 parallel.
s
l
In Microlok-II system, Input capacity of each Vital input ( )
5. B
card is_______
)
A) 8 input B) 16 input 1
C) 32 input D) None of the above
6
t
In Microlok-II system, each Vital output card drives ( )
6. C
_______no. of relays
)
A) 4 B) 8 C) 16 D) 32 1
181 | P a g e
6
In Microlok-II system, each Non-vital input- output card ( )
7. D
can be connected with maximum _____ no. of inputs and
)
_____ no. of outputs respectively.
3
A) 16 Inputs & 16 Outputs B) 8 Inputs & 8 2

Outputs
C) 16 Inputs & 32 Outputs D) 32 Inputs & 32
Outputs
I
&
182 | P a g e
s
Non-vital Inputs are ( )
8. A
)
A) Control Panel Push Buttons & Key contacts
B) Track Circuits TPRs. Point Detection C
C) VCOR indication
D) None the above o
183 | P a g e
o
&
s
In the Card File the Power Supply Card is normally placed ( )
9. C
in the slot no. _____
)
A) 1 B) 15 C) 16 D) 20 1
6
In Microlok-II system, PC / Lab top loaded with ( )
10. D
Maintenance tool software can to connect to Port
)
184 | P a g e
No._____ of CPU card.
5
A) 1 B) 3 C) 4 D)
5
In Microlok-II, the 48 Pin Connector assembly is used for ( )
11. C
__________
)
A) Vital Input boards only B) Vital Output V

boards only
C) Vital Input and Output boards D) Non-vital I/O i
boards
t
185 | P a g e
t
s
In Microlok-II, the 96 Pin connector assembly is used for ( )
12. D
___________
)
A) Vital Input boards only B) Vital Output N

boards only
C) Vital Input and Output boards D) Non-vital I/O o
boards
n
186 | P a g e
a
s
To start design of MLK II based Interlocking system, ( )
13. D
Inputs required are ________
)
A
A) Approved Signal Interlocking Plan & Front Plate
Drawing l
B) CT rack termination details.
C) Details of any additional interlocking equipment to be l
interfaced with MLKII.
D) All of these o
e
In Microlok-II, each card file should be provided with ( )
14. D
__________
)
A) Power Supply Card B) CPU card A

C) VCOR D) All of these
l
187 | P a g e
h
e
( )
15. In Microlok-II, Application Program ‘ * ‘ symbol is used A
for _______ )
S
A) SERIES B) PARALLEL
E
C) BACK CONTACT D) BIT SEPERATION
R
In Microlok-II, Application Program ‘+ ‘ symbol is used ( )

16. B
for _______ )
A) SERIES B) PARALLEL P
A
L
( D))
17.
In Microlok-II, Application Program ‘ , ‘ symbol is used for
BIT
SEPERATIO
188 | P a g e
_______ N
A) SERIES B) PARALLEL
In Microlok-II, Application Program ‘ ( ‘ symbol is used ( )
18. C
for _______ )
A) SERIES S
T
B) PARALLEL
A
C) START OF PARALLEL PATH
R
D) END OF PARALLEL PATH T
189 | P a g e
T
In Microlok-II, Application Program ‘ ) ‘ symbol is used ( )

19. D
for _______ )
A) SERIES B) PARALLEL E
C) START OF PARALLEL PATH D) END OF PARALLEL PATH
N
190 | P a g e
( )
20. D
In Microlok-II, Application Program ‘ ; ‘ symbol is used
)
for _______
E
A) SERIES
N
B) PARALLEL D
C) END OF PARALLEL PATH

O
D) END OF STATEMENT/ SECTION
F
191 | P a g e
I
N
In case of Distributed Interlocking system ( )
21. C
_________________ is / are required to be used in place
of Main Signalling Copper Cable between
)
Relay/Equipment Room and Location Boxes/ Goomties.
A) Object Controllers B) Optical Fiber Cable
b
C) both A & B D) None of these
o
&
192 | P a g e
.
CHAPTER 3
STATE TRUE or FALSE
(
1. The SIMIS S basic system meets the Generic (
)
CENELEC SIL3 safety standards. F
)
(
2. The SIMIS-S is following the coded mono (
)
processing as TWO 1-out-of-1 processors in T
standby configuration. )
(
3. In SIMIS S System, Reaction time of less than (
)
1.5 seconds for showing a restrictive aspect T
after a hazardous event occurs. )
(
4. SIMIS S System behavior is Fail-safe, if (
)
failures occur within the system or the T
operating modules )
(
5. In SIMIS S System, RS-232 protocol is used. (
)
F
)
(
6. PROFIBUS Protocol means Process Field Bus (
)
Protocol. T
193 | P a g e
)
(
7. PROFIBUS protocol includes fault detection, (
)
because of safety reasons no correction T
procedure is implemented. )
(
8. In PROFIBUS protocol, if a telegram is (
)
detected as false this telegram is send again. T
)
(
9. In SIMIS S System, Digital Input Modules (
)
(Vital) and Digital output Modules (Vital) T
are provided with hot swapping )
feature.
(
10. In SIMIS S System, Provides Interface (
)
between the profibus and I/O modules in an T
Electronic Terminal station. )
194 | P a g e
MULTIPLE CHOICE:
1. Maximum length, for which PROFIBUS ( B)
with copper cable can be used, without ) 200m
repeater is _____
A) 100m B) 200m C) 500m

D)1000m
2. Maximum length of PROFIBUS with ( D)15KM
Optical Fiber Cable is _____ )
A) 1KMB) 5KMC) 10KM D)15KM

3. In SIMIS S System, the address switch is a ( C) 10
_____position dipswitch to identify the )
correct Input / output card by the
processor. ( C )
A) 6 B) 8 C) 10
D)16
4. In SIMIS S System, Input capacity of each ( C) 4
Digital Input Module (Vital) is )
A) 16 B) 8 C) 4
D)32
5. In SIMIS S System, each Digital Output ( D)4
Module (Vital) drives _____ no. of relays. )
A) 32 B) 16 C) 8
D)4
195 | P a g e
6. In SIMIS S System, Rated input voltage of ( B) 24V
Digital Input Module (Vital) is _____ ) DC
A) 12V DC B) 24V DC
C) 60V DC D)110V AC
7. In SIMIS S System, Rated output voltage ( B) 24V
of Digital output Module (Vital) is _____ ) DC
A) 12V DC B) 24V DC
C) 60V DC D)110V AC
8. In SIMIS S System, each Electronic ( D) all of
Terminal Station shall be provided ) these
with__________
A) Interface module
B) Power module
C) Digital Input and Output modules
D) all of these.
1 --------------------- megger (insulation tester) shall ( a)

be used to test insulation of signaling cable shall 500
. ) Volt
DC
a) 500 Volt DC b)
500 Volt AC
c) 100 Volt DC d)
100 Volt AC
2 __________ relay back contact shall be ( b)
provided across DR back contact to ensure DECR
cascading arrangement in 3- aspect signal )
circuit.
a) HECR b) DECR c) RECR

d) HR
196 | P a g e
State TRUE or FALSE
1 The insulation resistance of the ( False

new Signaling cables should not )
be less than 10M ohms/ KM
(True/False)
2 Periodicity of cable meggering ( False
for tail cables is once in a year. )
(True/False)
S19 chapter no.1
1. The alphabet U is used in signaling for ( B

indicating
(A) point (B) route (c) slot (D) track )
2. The alphabet T is used in signaling for ( A
indicating
(A) track (B) signal (c)slot (D) train stop )
3. Symbol indicates in ( C
signaling.5 DR
)
(A)Attention aspect control relay of signal
No.5 (B) caution aspect controlling
relay of sig.No.5 (c) clear aspect control relay
of sig.No.5 (D) None
4. Symbol ( B
5
indicates in signaling.
)
(A)ON aspect lamp of signal No.5
(B) caution aspect lamp of signal No.5
(c) Attention aspect lamp of signal No.5
(D) clear aspect lamp of signal No.5
5. ( C
Symbol indicates the
)
relay. ~
(A) Slow to release ( B) Slow to pick up
(C) AC immunized (D) None
197 | P a g e
6. The Alphabet ‘C’ used in signaling for ( A
(A) Checking (B) Clear (C) Caution (D) None
)
7. above line indicates ( C
(A) Arm (B) Back (C) Front (D) None
)
SIGNALLING RELAYS CHAPTER NO: 2

1. Relays which are connected directly to track are called ( B
as : )
(A) Line Relays (B) Track Relays
(C) Polarized Relays (D) None
2. The Relays which close same set of contacts when ( B
energized with normal polarity or reverse polarity )
supply are known as :
(A) Polarized relays (B) DC Neutral
relays
(C) None (D) Vital relays
3. The relays which have contacts with atleast one non- ( C
fusible contact )
(A) None (B) Vital
(C) None proved type (D) Proved
type
4. An electromagnetic device which is used to convey ( C
information from one circuit to )
Another circuit through a set of contacts is known as:
(A) Economizer push button (B) Switch
(C) Relays (D) None
5. The relays which are used for controlling signal gears ( C
are known as: )
(A)Shelf type (B)Line relays
(C) Vital relays (D) Non Vital relays
6. Metal to metal contact relays are known as : ( C
(A) None Proved type (B) None Vital Type )
(C) Proved Type (D) None
CHAPTER NO:3
1. In shelf type relays contacts can be: ( C

(A) Dependent (B) Independent (C)
Dependent & Independent (D) None )
198 | P a g e
2. In a relay Copper/Brass pins provided on the ( C
armature facing the magnet poles to maintain a
small air-gap in its attracted position is known as : )
(A) Yoke (B)Contact (C)
Residual pin (D) None
3. Shelf type line works on : ( B
(A) 24 V DC (B) 12 V DC (C) 110 V
DC (D) 12 V AC )
4. Front contact of shelf type relay has contact ( C
resistance of
(A) 0.1 ohm (B) 0.5 ohm (C) 0.2 )
ohm (D) 10 ohm
5. To avoid damage to contacts during ( A
transportation,the item provided in shelf type
relays is known as : )
(A) Transportation screw (B) Residual pin
(C) Coil terminal (D) None
6. Shelf type track relay can be energized maximum ( C
upto :
(A) 125% of P.U.V. (B) 300% )
of P.U.V
(C) 250% of P.U.V. (D) 335%
of P.U.V
7. POH for track relays shelf type relay: ( C
(A) 15 Years (B) Not required
(C) 10 Years (D) 20 Years )
8. POH for shelf type line relays ( C
(A) Not required (B) 10
Years )
(C) 15 Years (D) None
9. AC immunization is achieved in shelf type AC ( C
immunized relays by
(A) Magnetic shunt )
(B) Two copper slugs
(C) Magnetic shunt & two copper slugs
(D) None
10. AC immunity of AC immunized shelf type line ( B
relay is
(A) 100 V (B) 300 V )
(C) 50 V (D) None
11. AC immunity of AC immunized track relay is ( D
(A) 100 V (B) 150 V
(C) 300 V (D) 50 V )
Chapter-4
199 | P a g e
1. The interchangeable contacts in Q-Series ( B
relays
A) A5,A6 B)B5,B6 C) D5,D6 )
D)None
2. Plug in type line relays have POH of ( B
A)10yrs. B)No Overhauling C) 15 yrs. D)
10- 12 yrs. )
3. How many Code pins are used at a time in ‘Q’ ( D
Series relays.
A) 2 B) 3 C) 4 D) 5 )
4. All the contacts in ‘Q’ Series relays are ( A
A) Independent B)
Dependent )
C) Independent & Dependent D) None
of these
5. The contacts used in ‘Q’ Series relays are ( B
A) M to M B) M to C C) M to M & M to C
D) None of these )
6. QNN1 Consists of how many neutral relays. ( B
A) Only One B) Two C) Three D)
None )
7. QNA1 relays are used in ( C
A)Relay room internal circuits
B)All external circuits )
C) All external circuits & internal relays in RR
energized from external feed
D) None
8. QS3 relays have coil resistance of ( A
A) 1000ohms B) 100 Ohms C) 10 Ohms
D) 10000 Ohms )
9. QS3 are used as ( B
A) TPR’s
B) B) EVR & SUPR in Axle Counters )
C) C)Double line Block Inst.
D) Single line Handle type Block Inst.
10. QB3 has a permanent magnet nearer ( B
A)Heel piece side B) Armature Side C) In the
Center D) None )
11. QB3 relays are used in ( A
A) Single line token less push button block
inst. )
B) Double line block inst
C) Diado Instrument
D) None
12. QBCAI relay heavy duty contact can carry ( B
current upto
A) 3A B) 30A C) 15A D) 20A )
200 | P a g e
13. QBAI relays are used in ( C
A) Single line token inst.
B) Single line token less push button )
C) Diado Single line block Instrument
D) Double line Block Inst.
14. QSPA1 relays are used in as ( B
A) TR B) TPR C) WLR D) None
)
15. QSPA1 relays have pick up time of ( A
A) 540 – 600 m sec. B) 220 m sec. C) 150 m
sec. D) 300 m sec. )
16. QBCA1 has a contact configuration of ( B
A) 8F/4B B) 2F heavy duty/ 4B C) 4F/4B
D) None )
17. QL1 has a permanent magnet near to ( B
A) Armature B) Heel piece side C) At the
center D) None )
18. How many coils are used in QL1 relay? ( B
A) only One B) Two coils C) Three D)
None of these )
Chapter No.5
Relays & Cables
1. How many code pins used in K-50 relays ( B

A) 4 Nos. B) 2 Nos. C) 1 No.
D) None )
2. How many maximum relays can be ( C
accommodated in a mini group
A) 30 Nos. B) 15 Nos. C) 2 Nos. )
D) 1 No.
3. in a Siemen’s interlocked relay, how the ( B
latching is achieved.
A) Magnetically B) Mechanically C) )
Electronically D) None
4. Siemen’s relays work with ( B
A) 24 V DC B) 60 V DC C) 24 V AC
D) 60 V AC )
5. K-50 relays are classified as ( A
A) K50-A, K50-B, K50-E type B) K50-C,
K50-F )
C) All same D) None
6. Siemen’s UECR relay contact configuration is ( C
A) 3F/ 3B B) 6F/2B C) 5F/1B
201 | P a g e
D) None )
7. Siemen’s ON/ OFF ECR contact configuration ( A
is
A) 3F/ 3B B) 5F/1B C) 6F/2B )
D) 4F/4B
8. for wiring of 4 minigroups, the maximum ( C
tagblock required is
A) 100 Way B) 80 way C) 160 Way )
D) 200 Way
9. Siemen’s relay contacts are ( A
A) Independent type B)
Dependent type )
C) Dependent type & Independent type D)
None of these
10. How many guide pins are used in Siemen’s ( C
relays
A) 4 Nos. B) 3 Nos. C) 2 Nos. )
D) None
Chapter No.6
1. The purpose of ECR is ( D

A) Providing Cascading arrangement
B) Red lamp protection & Signal aspect )
indication at the operating place.
C) Controlling the signal in accordance with the
aspect displayed on signal in advance.
D) All A, B, C.
2. I type current transformer method is generally ( A
used for
A) Red lamp B) Yellow lamp C) Green )
Lamp D) None
3. For picking up of Siemen’s UECR, the minimum ( C
no.of Route lamps required to glow is
A) 2 Nos. B) 4 Nos. C) 3 Nos. )
D) 5 Nos.
Chapter No.7
1. Siemen’s motorized clockwork timer relay works ( B
202 | P a g e
with )
A) 24 V DC B) 110 V AC C) 24 V AC
D) None
2. Siemen’s motorized clockwork timer relay has ( A
contact configuration of )
A) One front & one back B) 2 front & 2 back
C) 3front & 3 back D) None
3. QJ1 is used for ( C
A) Track relay B) TPR C) Timer )
D) None
Chapter No.8
1. QT 2 track relay is used in ( A

A) Non RE B) RE
C) Non Re & RE D) None )
2. QT 2 has contact configuration of ( B
A) 2F/2BB) 2F/1B )
C) 2F only D) 2B only
3. QTA2 &QBAT are used in ( C
A) Non RE only B) Non RE
C) RE only D) None )
4. QBAT has contact configuration of ( C
A)2F only B) 2B only
C) 2F/2B D) None )
5. The AC immunity of QBAT is ( B
A) 50 V B) 80 V
C) 90 V D) None )
6. The AC immunity of QTA2 is ( C
A) 80 V B) 90 V
C) 50 V AC D) None )
7. The repeater relay used in relay room when ( C
QTA2/QBAT is used as TR.
A) QB3 B) QNA1 )
C) QSPA1 D) QBCA1
8. Back contact available in QTA2/QT2 is used ( A
for
A) Cross Protection B) )
Double cutting
C) Cross Protection & Double cutting D)
None
CHAPTER NO-9
203 | P a g e
1. Siemens thermo flasher unit is used for ( A
(A) To create flashing of indication lamps on panel when
needed. )
(B) (B) To take photos
(C) For arc wilding
(D) (D) None
2. Siemens thermo flasher works with ( D
(A)12 V DC/AC (B) 110 V AC
(C) 220 V AC (D) All A,B,C,D )
3. What is flashing frequency of siemens thermo ( B
flasher unit ?
(A) 120/mnt (B) 60/mnt )
(C)90/mnt (D) None
CHAPTER NO-10
SLOW ACTING RELAYS
1 Slow to release arrangement in ( C

relays is created by
(A) Connecting a resistance across relay )
R1,R2.
(B) Connecting a condenser across relay
R1,R2.
(C) A resistance & a condenser in series are
connected across relay R1,R2.
(D) None.
CHAPTER NO-11
1. When DC polarized relay is energized with ( D

normal polarity +Ve on R1 and –Ve
On )
R2, the contact made is
(A)
No contact made (B)
Front contact (C) Back contact (D)
Normal contact
2. When DC polarized relay is energized with ( D
reverse polarity i.e; -Ve on R1 and +Ve on
R2, the contact made is )
(A)
Normal contact (B) No contact (C)
204 | P a g e
Back contact (D) Reverse contact
3. When DC Polarized relay is in de-energized ( C
condition, the contact made is called
(A) )
Front contact (B) Back contact (C)
No contact made (D)
None of these
CHAPTER NO-12
1. Generally what cable is used for Q-series relay ( A

wiring
A) 16 Strand 0.2 mm flexible wire B) )
0.6 mm Copper single strand C)
D)
2. Generally outdoor cables numbering starts with ( B
-----conductor as No.1 and ends with
---------------conductor at each layer. )
A) Yellow, Blue B) Blue, Yellow C) Red, Blue
D) None
3. No spare conductors required to left in case total ( C
number of conductors used is
A) 12C B) 30C C) )
Three or less D)None
4. The Megger used for testing Signalling cables is ( C
A) 110 Volts DC Megger B)
200 Volts DC Megger )
C) 500 Volts DC Megger D)
None
Sl. Question ( Answer

No. )
1. When RKT key is locked in condition then ( d) a&b
-------------------contact/s is/are in make condition )
a) 1&2 b) 3&4 c) 3&5 d) a&b
2. When RKT key is out then ----------------- contact/s is/are (
in open condition )
a) 1&2 b) 3&4 c) 3&5 d) all
3. Normal working voltage of RKT is --------------------- ( b) 3.75 volt DC plus line
a) 3.75 DC volt b) 3.75 volt DC plus line drop c) 10 volt ) drop
DC d) 12 volt DC
205 | P a g e
4. The maximum stroke of single wire lever lock is ( b) 200
---------------mm. )
a) 150 b) 200 c) 100
d) 45
5. YSR relay ensures ---------------------------- feature ( a) One
a) One slot one train b) one signal one ) slot
train one
c) run trough d) a&b train
State True or False
Sl. Question ( ) Answer

No.
1. Electric lever lock is used where mechanical control on a electrical ( False
)
equipment is required.
(True/False)
2. Maximum THREE slides can be placed in the EPD. ( ) Fal
(True/False) se
3. C and D detection slides of EPD are not inter-changeable where as ( ) Fal
siemens point machine are inter-changeable. se
(True/False)
4. When in and out type of FPL is used then A type lock slid shall be used ( )
in EPD.
(True/False)
5. When in and out type of FPL is used then B type lock slid shall be used in ( False
)
EPD.
(True/False)
6. When RKT key is to be transmitted then 1,2 & 3,5 contacts are in make ( )
condition.
(True/False)
Sl. Question ( Answer

No )
.
1 The stroke of siemens point ( c) 143
machine is ----------------------mm. )
a) 140
b) 150
c) 143
d) 220
2 In signal machine ( a) Pick up
hold OFF ) coil
mechanism is
206 | P a g e
initially pick
through
--------------
a) Pick up coil
b) hold off coil

c) diode &
resistance
d) a&b both
3 Feed to signal ( a) K
machine motor is ) contact
control through
----------------
a) K contact
b) H contact
c) resistance
d) a&b both
4 Normal position of ( b) K make
H and k contact of ) & H make
signal machine is
-------------
a) K make & H
open
b) K make
& H make
c) K open & H
open
d) K open
& H make
5 Locking provided ( c) in & out
in GRS 5E point )
machine
---------------- type.
a) Rotary
b) straight trough
c) in
& out
d) clamp type
6 When point is set ( d) a&c
and lock in normal ) both
then ------------------
makes.
a) RC contact
207 | P a g e
b) NC contact
c) ND contact
d) a&c both
7 Locking of ( a)
switches provided ) Combine
in siemens point
and IRS machine
is/are
------------------
type.
a) Combine
b) individual
c)
clamp
d) a&b both
8 Simultaneous ( a) Crank
power & manual ) handle cut
operation of point out
machine is contact
prevented
by-----------------
a) Crank handle
cut out contact b)
locking of crank
handle
c) ward & feather
on crank handled)
a&b both
9 Maximum ( b) 4
-------------------num )
ber of slides can
be used in
electrical point
detector.
a) 3
b) 4
c) 2
d) 6 Various
detection &
control contact
10 available in IRS/ ( b) 4
siemens point ) control &4
machine are detection
------------------.
208 | P a g e
a) 2 Control &2 detection b)
4 control &4 detection
c) 3 control &3 detection
d) 8 control &8 detection
11 Various detection ( c) 3/3a ,

contact available ) 4/4a 7/7a
in IRS/ siemens & 8/8a
point machine are
-----------------
a) 1/1a , 2/2a 5/5a & 6/6a
b) 1/1a , 2/2a 3/3a & 4/4a
c) 3/3a , 4/4a 7/7a & 8/8a
d) 1/1a , 3/3a 5/5a & 6/6a
12 ------------------------ ( b)
snubbing ) mechanical
arrangement is
provided in IRS/
siemens point
machine
a) electrical
b) mechanical
c) No
d) a & b
13 ------------------------ ( a)
snubbing ) Electrical
arrangement is
provided in
GRS5E point
machine
a) Electrical
b) mechanical
c) No
d) a & b
14 During obstruction ( d) a ,b & c
test of machine )
operated point
with 5mm test
piece -----------
a) Point shall not
lock
b) friction clutch
shall slip
c) Detection
contacts shall not
make d) a ,b &
c
209 | P a g e
15 Difference ( a) 0.5
between normal ) amps
working current
and obstruction
current shall not
be more than
-------------- Amps.
a) 0.5 amps
b) 5 amps
c) 2.5 amps
d) 10amps
16 Power supply to ( d) a &c
point machine is ) both
control
at-----------------
level.
a) Circuit
b) battery
c) machine
d) a &c both
17 Crank handle ( a) Power
contacts are ) b) manual
provided to
prevent
simultaneous
----------------------
and
--------------------
operation.
a) Power
b) manual
c) hydraulic
d) crowbar
18 Obstruction ( a) 2 times
current shall not )
be more than
-------------------- of
normal working
current.
a) 2 times
b) 0.5 times
c) 100 times
d) 4 times
19 When electrical ( d) a&b
point detector is )
fixed on double
slip then slides
210 | P a g e
used is / are
-------------.
a) Detector slid
C&D b)
Detector slid A&B
c) Detector slid C,
D & lock slid A d)
a&b
20 Detector slid C ( a) Nearest
shall be connected ) switch rail
to ------------------
a) Nearest switch
rail b)
farthest switch rail
c) Any one switch
rail d)
FPL
21 __________contact is connected ( a) H
across hold OFF coil of signal )
machine.
a) H
b) K
c) 0 to 5 band.
d) 0 to 45 band
1. Friction clutch siemens (e ) a) electrical snubbing
2. Friction clutch signal machine (d ) b) unauthorized operation
3. Force drop arrangement (c ) c) mechanical/ magnetic

Stuck up
4. Normal locking signal machine (b ) d) shock less holding of
signal arm at OFF
5. diode and resistance (a ) e) mechanical snubbing
211 | P a g e
1 When point is set and lock in reveres ( False
then RC & RD contact will makes.
(True/False) )
2 When point is not set ( True
and lock in normal
then RC & NC contact )
will makes.
(True/False)
3 When point machine ( True
switching unit is taken
out then RD & ND )
contact will makes.
(True/False)
4 Economizer contact in ( True
lever lock is for power
saving. )
(True/False)
5 H contact in signal ( False
machine is used to
control feed to motor )
(True/False)
6 Stroke of Siemens, IRS and GRS 5E ( False
point machine is equal.
(True/False) )
7 Function of top roller and bottom roller ( False
of Siemens point machine switching
assembly is detect setting of switches )
and locking of switches respectively.
(True/False)
8 IRS point machine contains total four False
detection and control contacts.
(True/False)
9 Snubbing in Siemens point machine is ( False
electrical type.
(True/False) )
10 Siemens point machine friction clutch ( False
adjustment should be done at site.
(True/False) )
11 When point is in mid position all ( False
control and detection contacts are in
made position in Point machine. )
(True/False)
12 The normal condition of “K” and “H” ( False
contacts in Signal machine circuit is
open. )
(True/False)
212 | P a g e
13 In Electric detector, NWKR is wired ( True
across Normal Shunt contact
(True/False) )
14 Maximum cores ( True
available in
underground signaling )
cables are 37 cores
(True/False)
15 The motor of IRS and Siemens point ( False
machine are interchangeable
(True/False) )
16 Electrical parameter of The motor of ( True
IRS and Siemens point machine are
same )
(True/False)
17 Thrust of The of IRS ( False
and Siemens point
machine are same )
(True/False)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT ANSWER
N Question ( Answ
o ) er
.
1 “Authority to ( b)
proceed” is given to ) Driver
-------------- to enter
the block section with
his train
a) Guard
b) Driver
c) SM
d) none
2 Neales ball token ( b)
Block Instrument is ) Singl
used for e line
a) Double line sectio
section b) n
Single line section
c) Automatic territory
d) none of above
213 | P a g e
3 The POH of NBT ( a) 10
Block instrument is ) years
a) 10 years
b) 7 years
c) 12 years
d) 5 years
4 In double line Block ( d) 3
working in Non- RE ) Lines
area we require +
a) 2 Lines only separ
b) 3 Lines only ate
c) 2 Line + separate Earth
Earth return d) 3 return
Lines + separate
Earth return
5 The Resistance of ( b) 50
door lock coil is ) Ohms
_________ in SGE
DLBI
a) 40 Ohms
b) 50 Ohms
c) 80 Ohms
d) 160 Ohms
6 Adequate distance ( c)
means ) Dista
a) 200 Mts nce
b) 180 Mts given
c) Distance given to to
ensure safety d) ensur
Breaking distance + e
sighting distance safety
7 TGT lock coils picks ( b) 2
up _________ no s )
of times while turning
the handle to TG
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
8 Tokens are classified ( c) 5
into )
_________________
____ no s of types
a) 3
b) 4
c) 5
d) 6
9 The POH of DLBI is ( a) 7
a) 7 year ) year
b) 12 years
214 | P a g e
c) 10 years
d) when SSE found
necessary
1 Bell spring Assembly ( d) 4
0 has _________ no of )
terminals in DLBI to
use in Non – R.E AC
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
1 When Bell plunger ( c) 3
1 pressed _________ )
no of springs will
make in DLBI SGE
type Non – R.E AC
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
1 When handle is ( c) 3
2 turned to TOL the no )
of pairs of contacts
that will make in
DLBI byculla make
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
1 TOL contact is DLBI ( a)
3 will make in ) only
a) only in TOL in
Position TOL
b)TOL &line clear Positi
c) Line closed on
d) Only in Line clear
1 Minimum no of Track ( b) 2
4 circuit required for )
block release circuit
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
1 Voltage required to (
5 pick up PR relay is )
________
a)1.7 v
b)2 v
c)2.2 v
d)1.5 v
215 | P a g e
1 Resistance of ( b)148
6 TCF/TGT relay is ) ohms
____ ohms
a)150ohms
b)148 ohms
c)200 ohms
d)136 oms
1 Voltage required to ( a)4.5
7 pick up TCF/TGT ) v
relay is
a)4.5 v
b)5.5 v
c)3.5 v
d)6 v
1 Current required to ( a)
8 pick up TCF/TGT ) 160m
relay is a
a) 160ma
b) 120ma
c) 110ma
d)100ma
1 No: of tokens that ( d)1
9 can be extracted at a )
time in NBT B/I
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d)1
2 In a block station the ( c) 2
0 minimum no: of block )
Instruments provided
are
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d)1
MATCH THE FOLLOWING
1. LCPR (a) DLBI

( )
2. TCF & TGT Coil Resistance (b) 148 Ohms
( )
3. PR Relay (c) 77 Ohms
( )
4. DLBI Line curent (d) 25mA
( )
5. In coming trains (e) Bottom Indicator (
)
216 | P a g e
6. Neales Ball Token Instrument (f) Spigot
( )
7. SR1 & SR2 (g) LSS Clearance circuit
( )
8. Rest Contact (h) Neales Token Instrument
( )
9. Butter fly type contact (j) DLBI SGE make
( )
10.POH of neales token inst (j) 10 years
( )
11. POH of DLBI Podanur make (k) 7 years
( )
No. Question ( ) A
ns
w
er
1 Adequate Distance is the distance given as120mts to ensure safety ( ) False
(True/False)
2 Block back is a message given to the driver to enter into block ( F

) alse
section
(True/False)
3 The wring of Normal & Reverse polarity instrument are Identical in ( F

) alse
Neal’s Token Instrument
(True/False)
4 Double line Block instrument should have 2 indicator only ( T
) rue
(True/False)
5 Double line Block instrument can be used for single line working ( F
) alse
(True/False)
6 PR in NBT does not require P.O.H ( F

) alse
(True/False)
7 In DLBI all the Block operation are done at sending end. ( F
) alse
(True/False)
8 Authority to proceed is given to the Guard of a special train ( F
) alse
(True/False)
217 | P a g e
9 Premature TOL is done in S/L Token Block Instrument ( F
) alse
(True/False)
10 Rest contact Breaks isolates PR with line Circuit ( T
) rue
(True/False)
11 Rest contact is dynamic is nature ( F
) alse
(True/False)
12 The object of providing Block Instrument is to prevent more than ( T
) rue
one train in a block section at a time
(True/False)
13 Absolute Block working is to maintain space internal between two ( T
) rue
trains
(True/False)
14 The Driver is a Absolute Block working should not enter into the ( T
) rue
Block section without proper Authority
(True/False)
15 Token is handed over to the driver of a train as an authority to ( T
) rue
proceed
(True/False)
16 At a time max no of tokens extracted from a pair of Block ( F
) alse
instruments are 2 No s
(True/False)
17 To connect pair of NBT instrument we require 2 lines wire and ( F
) alse
earth return
(True/False)
18 On a single line where trains work under absolute Block system ( T

) rue
every train in its progress from one block station to next shall be
signalled over the block instruments
(True/False)
19 Inserting the token into the block instrument indicate that the train is ( T
) rue
in his custody/train reached safely by the S.M
(True/False)
20 I R S Drg No for Neal’s ball token instruments is SA 20701/M ( T
) rue
(True/False)
21 Solid balls are used as tokens in NBT Instrument ( F
) alse
(True/False)
22 The groove cut in Balls of NBT Instrument is to easy carry ( F
) alse
(True/False)
23 Different hole configurations are provided to distinguish the token ( T
) rue
belonging to block instruments of different block section
(True/False)
24 SM’s key when ‘out’ in NBT will mechanically lock the bottom ( T
) rue
(operating) handle and Top Handle only
(True/False)
218 | P a g e
25 Top handle can only be locked in its position at 85 from the vertical ( T
) rue
(True/False)
26 SM’s key removed no incoming or out going bell beats ( F

) alse
(True/False)
27 We can turn the top handle upto a maximum of 180 when token is ( F
) alse
not inserted
(True/False)
28 Top indicator is having only one indication i.e green ( F
) alse
(True/False)
29 LSS control key can extract only in TGT Position of B/H ( T
) rue
(True/False)
30 When tokens are available in the instrument it is possible to turn the ( T
) rue
block handle to TCF
(True/False)
31 When tokens are available in the instrument it is possible to turn the ( F
) alse
block handle to TGT
(True/False)
32 Safety catch allows declutching of commentator shaft from spring ( F
) alse
clutch shaft while turning the handle from line close to TCF/TGT
(True/False)
33 Lubrication is done with Axle oil medium grade to IS: 1628 ( ) True
(True/False)
34 Checking the polarity of NBT instruments is done by not less then ( T

) rue
superior grade (JE)
(True/False)
35 Adequate Distance is the distance sufficient to ensure safety ( T
) rue
(True/False)
36 6 types no: of types of block workings are existing in Indian ( T
) rue
railways
(True/False)
37 Resistance of PR relay is 77 ohms ( T
) rue
(True/False)
38 Resistance of Galvo relay is 150 ohms ( T
) rue
(True/False)
39 Current required to pick up Galvo relay is 20 ma ( T
) rue
(True/False)
40 Capacity of Tablet token block instrument is 36 no: ( F
) alse
(True/False)
41 commutater has three positions ( Normal,Reverse & center ) ( F
) alse
(True/False)
42 In normal position of commutater if plunger is pressed 1 &3 ( F

) alse
commutater spring contacts make
219 | P a g e
(True/False)
43 For shunting in the Block section Block handle should be kept in ( F
) alse
TOL condition where shunting is in progress
(True/False)
44 Block handle cannot be turned to TGT when there is no tokens in ( T
) rue
the Block instrument
(True/False)
QUESTION BANK FOR FM HANDLE TYPE INSTRUMENT

1 The following are the ( [
carrier frequencies in a
FM Instrument ) ]
a) 2700HZ or 1800HZ
b) 65HZ or 85HZ
c) 2000HZ or 2500HZ
c) All of the above
2 The codes required to ( [
turn the handle to TGT b
in FM Instrument ) ]
a) + Ve
b) Carrier modulated
by 65HZ with +ve
c) Carried modulated
by 65HZ
d) Carrier modulated
by 85HZ with +ve
turn to handle to TCF c
in FM Instrument ) ]
a) +Ve
by 65HZ with +ve
c) Carrier modulated
by 85HZ with +ve
d) Carried modulated
by 65HZ
turn the handle to line d
closed position in FM ) ]
Instrument
a) +Ve
220 | P a g e
by 65HZ with +ve
c) Carried modulated
by 65HZ
by 85HZ with +ve
5 The code that ( [
Transmits during TOL b
code Transmission ) ]
a) +Ve
by 65HZ
c) Carrier modulated
by 85HZ with +ve
by 65HZ with +ve
6 Time Release Indicator ( [
operated by the c
following relay in FM ) ]
Instrument
a) 1R b) 2R
c) 3R d)
None
7 Normal cancellation ( [
performed with the a
following switch ) ]
a) S1 b) S2
c) PB1 d) PB2
8 To turn the handle to ( [
TGT the following b
relays are to be picked ) ]
up apart from other
selections in FM
instrument.
a) CR1 & CR2
b) CR2, NR & TRSR
c) CR2 & NR
d) CR2 & BLR
9 Unauthorised ( [
operation is prevented c
by the following key. ) ]
a) Shunt Key
b) Maintenance Key
c) SM’s Key
d) None
1 ‘One Train one line ( [
0 clear’ principle b
complained by the ) ]
221 | P a g e
following relay in FM
instrument.
a) 2R b) TRSR
c) 3R d) PBPR
1 The following is the ( [
1 line relay in FM c
Instrument. ) ]
a) PBPR b) TOLR
c) NR d) CR1
1 The following is the ( [
2 line relay in FM b
Instrument. ) ]
a) PBPR b) BLR
c) TOLR d) CR2
1 3R used for the ( [
3 following purpose in c
FM Instrument ) ]
a) rain complete arrival
b) Push back normalisation
c) To operate time release indicator
d) None of the above
1 Which of the following ( [
4 is telephone relay. c
a) TER b) TEPR ) ]
c) TELR d) TOLR
1 To pick up CR2 the ( [
5 following Frequency is a
required. ) ]
a) 65HZ
b) 85HZ
c) None of the above
d) All of the above
6 is irrelevant to time d
release indicator in FM ) ]
Instrument.
a) 3R b) Free
c) S1 d) S2
1 CR1 not to be picked ( [
7 up for c
a) Line closed to TCF ) ]
b) TCF to line closed
c) Line closed to TGT
d) TGT to line closed
222 | P a g e
1 CR2 to be picked up ( [
8 for c
a) Line closed to TCF ) ]
b) TCF to line closed
c) Line closed to TGT
d) TGT to line closed
1 CR1 will not be help ( [
9 full in the following c
operation ) ]
a) N to R b) R to N
c) N to L d) L to N
2 The following is not a ( [
0 power supply d
arrangement with ) ]
regard to Block
Instrument.
a) Line battery
b) Local battery
c) External battery
d) Internal battery
1 is relevant regarding d
AC RE area with ) ]
respect to Block
instrument
a) Block Filter unit
b) Block Bell
Equipment
c) Isolation
Transformer d) All
of the above
2 is irrelevant to Time d
Release Indicator ) ]
a) 3R b) S1
c) Free d) S2
2 TRSR is ( [
3 a) Slow to Pick up b
b) Slow to Release ) ]
d) All of the above
2 TOLR is ( [
4 a) Slow to Pick up b
b) Slow to Release ) ]
d) All of the above
2 To turn the handle to ( [
223 | P a g e
5 TGT, which of the a
following frequencies ) ]
are relevant
a) 65HZ
b) 85HZ
d) All of the above
True or False
1 Galvanoscope Indicates (T)
incoming and outgoing
DC currents. (
(True/False) )
2 Galvanoscope Indicates ( (F)
only outgoing DC )
current in FM
instrument
(True/False)
3 Time Release Indicator ( (T)
operated during )
cancellation of line clear
(True/False)
4 Time Release Indicator ( (F)
operated during push )
back normalisation of
the Block Instrument
(True/False)
5 Time Release indicator ( (F)
displays green with )
locked and changes to
white with free when
operated.
True/False
6 Switch S2 is used for ( (F)
cancellation of line clear )
True/False
7 Switch S1 is used for ( (F)
push back normalization )
of the Instrument
True/False
8 Switch S2 is used for ( (T)
push back normalization )
of the Instrument
224 | P a g e
True/False
9 The modulating frequencies are ( (T)
common for all Instruments )
(True/False)
10 TOL indicator normally displays a white ( (T)
. indication )
(True/False)
11 TOL indicator displays red indication ( (F)
. with ‘train on line’ before the train )
enter into block section
(True/False)
12 PB1 used to transmit DC Pulses for ( (T)
. exchanging bell code signals )
(True/False)
13 PB2 is a push button used in ( (T)
. conjunction with PB1 to transmit )
frequency modulated code
(True/False)
14 Movement of the handle to TCF, TGT ( (T)
. and back to normal position from TCF or )
TGT is controlled by a electrical lock
(True/False)
15 For turning the handle to TGT the lock is ( (T)
. initially energises at X position but gets )
force dropped before X’ and it attracts
at X’ position for further movement to
TGT
(True/False)
16 Check locking is provided to ensure the ( (T)
. conscious co-operation of the operator )
at the other end
(True/False)
17 Check locking is effective while turning ( (F)
. the handle from )
TGT to Normal
(True/False)
18 Block handle assembly consist of 24 sets ( (T)
. of spring contacts actuated )
during the cause of handle operation
(True/False)
19 Buzzer BZ1 operates when in a train ( (T)
. enters block section )
(True/False)
20 Buzzer BZ1 operates when a train clears ( (F)
. the block section )
(True/False)
225 | P a g e
21 BZ2 operated when a train clears the ( (T)
. block section )
(True/False)
22 BZ2 operated when a train enter the ( (F)
. block section )
(True/False)
23 SM’s key when removed the Instrument ( (F)
. is inoperative for all functions )
(True/False)
24 SM’s key when removed it is possible ( (T)
. for the reception of bell code )
signal or reception of transmission of
TOL code
(True/False)
25 Shunt key can be removed only in line ( (T)
. closed or TGT position )
(True/False)
26 Shunt key can be removed in TCF ( (F)
. position )
(True/False)
27 Shunt key cannot be removed in TCF ( (T)
. position )
(True/False)
28 If the shunt key is removed the ( (T)
. Instrument handle in locked )
mechanically
(True/False)
29 If the shunt key is removed the ( (F)
. instrument handle is locked electrically )
(True/False)
30 Insertion and extraction of shunt key (
. can be done with out SM’s key in the ) (F)
Instrument
(True/False)
31 Transmitter gives a FM output when (
. the DC feed us connected to )
(T)
it by different selection
(True/False)
32 The modulating frequency is selected (
. by the transmitter according to )
(T)
the condition of the Block Instrument
(True/False)
33 Receiver gives DC output for energising (
. either CR1 or CR2 irrespective )
of the modulating frequency of the
(F)
code received
(True/False)
226 | P a g e
34 The receiver is switched on when the (
. DC feed is connected through the )
relevant selections (T)
(True/False)
35 Level adjustment switch is a three (
. position switch associates with the )
(T)
Receiver
(True/False)
36 The level of the signal output of the (
. transmitter can be adjusted by level )
(T)
adjustment switch
(True/False)
37 Attenuator associates with the (
. transmitter ) (F)
(True/False)
38 Attenuator can be set to introduce the (
. required db loss on the received signal ) (T)
(True/False)
39 PBPR energised only when PB2 are (
. pressed )
(F)
(True/False)
40 PBPR energised when PB1 is pressed (
. when TOLR relay is energised )
(T)
with Block handle in ‘R’ position
(True/False)
41 PBPR when energised connects to line (
. battery –ve & +ve on L1 & L2 )
(F)
Respectively
(True/False)
42 PBPR when dropped connects NR relay (
. to line )
(True/False)
43 PBPR when dropped connects 24v to (
. the transmitter ) (F)
(True/False)
44 NR is a DC polar line Relay (
. (True/False) ) (F)
45 NR energises when –ve is received on (
. L1 and +ve to transmitter ) (F)
(True/False)
46 BLR is a DC Neutral line Relay (
(F)
. (True/False) )
47 BLR energises when –ve is received is (
. L1 and +ve on L2 ) (T)
(True/False)
48 TEPR is a DC polar Relay (
. (True/False) ) (F)
227 | P a g e
49 TELR is energised when the pressed (
. switch of hand micro telephone )
(T)
is pressed
(True/False)
50 TELR connects to telephone current to (
. the line through its back contact ) (F)
(True/False)
51 TELR isolates transmitter and receiver (
. from lines as they are connectedto lines )
(T)
through its back contact
(True/False)
52 3R is line clear cancellation Relay
(T)
. (True/False)
53 3R picks up after about 120 seconds on
. operating switch S1 during
(T)
cancellation of line clear
(True/False)
54 TRSR sticks in the LX’ position of the (
. operating handle ) (T)
(True/False)
55 TRSR release when the train passes last (
. vehicle Track circuit ) (F)
(True/False)
56 TOLR picks up only before CR2 picks up (
. at train receiving station ) (F)
(True/False)
57 TOLR operated when the train occupies (
. the first vehicle track circuit )
when the operating
handle is in TGT (T)
position.
(True/False)
58 TER operates when switch S1 is (
. operated )
(F)
(True/False)
59 TER operates when switch S1 is (
. operated and LSS controls Normalised )
(T)
(True/False)
60 CR1 picks up when a code of 1800HZ or (
. 2700HZ modulated by )
85HZ is received from (T)
the distant station
(True/False)
61 CR2 pick up when a code of 1800HZ or ( (T)
. 2700HZ Modulated by 65HZ )
is received from the
distant station
228 | P a g e
(True/False)
62 CR2 energises TOLR in the other end (
. instrument during TOL code )
(T)
Transmission
(True/False)
63 TOLR indicator is of magnetic stick type (
. (True/False) ) (T)
64 The Normal coil of TOLK is energised (

. through back contact of TOLR ) (F)
(True/False)
65 To Release coil of TOLK is energised (
. through XX’ and YY’ contact )
of Block handle (F)
(True/False)
66 ASR and HSR are conflicting Relays in FM (
. Instrument )
(T)
(True/False)
67 ASR picks up when block handle is in TCF (
. position with TRSR energised ) (F)
(True/False)
68 The front contact of ASR controls the (
. feed to the LSS )
(T)
(True/False)
69 To pick up ASR, TRSR front contact is (
. required ) (T)
(True/False)
70 Bell circuit is having two parallel path (
. one with BLR front contact )
another with NR Back
(F)
contact
(True/False)
71 Back contacts of CR1 and CR2 relays (
. have been proved to )
ensure that ‘PBPR’ relay will not be
energised while receiving (T)
modulated frequencies
(True/False)
72 To Ensure that relays NR and BLR are (
. not picked up simultaneously )
front contact of NR relay is proved in
(F)
BLR circuit
(True/False)
73 Back contact of ‘PBPR’ and front contact (
. of PBPR are proved in )
DC feed circuit of TX and (F)
RX respectively
(True/False)
229 | P a g e
74 Front contacts of CR1 & CR2 have been (
. proved into DC feed circuit )
for transmit to ensure
that no code except the
code of bell signals can (F)
be generated unless the
code relays are de-
energised
(True/False)
76 Since TOL to be transmitted (
. automatically, front contact of PBPR is )
not provided in DC feed circuit to the
(T)
Transmitter
(True/False)
77 Receiver to be in readiness to receive (
. the TOL code the DC feed circuit is )
taken via 2R relay block contact with
(T)
the block handle at R position
(True/False)
78 Press contact of the PB2 in the DC feed (
. circuit of the transmitter prevent DC )
feed to TX while acknowledging TOL (T)
code
(True/False)
79 Block handle contact BX and DY are (
. included in the DC feed circuit )
to the receiver minimises the battery
(T)
consumptions
(True/False)
80 SM’s key contact has not been proved in (
. the DC feed circuit of ) (T)
Transmitter to ensure (
that the TOL indicator )
will display immediately
to block section is
occupies irrespective of
the position of SM’s key
(True/False)
81 Cross protector to the lock magnet coil (
. is given through CR1 and )
(F)
CR2 front contact
(True/False)
82 TX and RX are connected to line ( (T)
. through the back contact of ‘TELR )
to ensure that during
conversation on
telephone no code in
230 | P a g e
transmitted
or received by the TX &
RX respectively at either
end
(True/False)
83 The telephone set is connected to the (
. lines through to front contact of TELR )
(True/False) (T)
84 The TELR feed is taken through to back (

. contact of CR1 & CR2 and )
TOLR to ensure that during transmission
(T)
and reception of TOL code to telephone
is disconnected
(True/False)
85 The front contact of TOLR is included in (
. the TELR pick up circuit to )
ensure that the telephone circuit is
disconnected the movement (F)
TOLR picks up to transmitter or receive
TOL code
(True/False)
86 TOLR is made slow to release since its (
. energising circuit is through )
the front contact of TRSR and stick (T)
circuit is through back contact of
(True/False)
87 TRSR is made slow to release to provide (
. the conditions required for )
the energises circuit of TOLR in which
(T)
the front contact of TRSR
and back contact of FVTPR included
(True/False)
88 Switch S1 Reverse contact has been (
. included in the ASR circuit ) (F)
(True/False)
89 In Non RE area FM signal super (
. imposed on to same pair of line )
(T)
wires of DC circuit
(True/False)
90 In RE area it is worded on a pair of (
. conductor of pet quad of main )
telecom cable and to Dc circuit workers
(T)
on two phantoms derived
from the pet quad
(True/False)
91 In AC RE area since a physical pair is (
. used for FM signal and a derived ) (F)
231 | P a g e
phantoms is used for DC the choke CH1
is very essential
(True/False)
Matching
1. Galvanoscope coil Resistance a) 18.2 ( )
2. Time Release Indicator b) 120 Sec ( )
3. Resistance of the c) 200 Ohms ( )
time Release
Indicator coil
4. To Turn B/H to TCF d) Lock to be ( )
energised at Y
Position
5. To turn B/H to line e) Lock to be ( )
closed from TCF or energised at D
TGT & B respectively
6. Locking effective at ‘X’ f) Check Locking ( )
7. B/H assembly g) 24 sets of spring ( )
contacts
8. Single stroke bell h) Coil Resistance ( )
310 Ohms & 70mA
9. Carrier Frequency i) 1800HZ & 2700HZ ( )
10.TELR Relay j) Coil Resistance 70 ( )
Ohms
11.Normal condition of signals and k) 1R ( )
controller
12.One Train one line clear l) TRSR ( )
13.Train on line Relay m) TOLR ( )
14.TER coil Resistance n) 50 Ohms ( )
15.TOLR o) Two coils of 500 ( )
Ohms & 200 Ohms
16.CR1 & CR2 p) conflicting Relay ( )
17.ASR & HSR q) external ( )
conflicting Relay
18.DC –Ve to be sent on L1 r) For Exchange of ( )
Bell code signals
19.Filter unit s) AC RE area ( )
20.Free indicator t) Green back ( )
ground
21.TOL u) Red Back ground ( )
22.Locked v) white Back ground ( )
23.Galvanoscope w) Polarised Indicator ( )
24.Shunt Key x) Locked Block Handle ( )
Mechanically
232 | P a g e
25.Bell coil unit y) NR & BLR front contact In Parallel ( )
QUESTION BANK FOR S23 PUSH BUTTON

1. To obtain the full advantage of Tokenless block working push
button type have been evolved (T)
(True/False)
2. A pair of push button instrument are connected with four (F)
line wires
(True/False)
3. Push button instruments are purely relay interlocked (T)
(True/False)
4. Push button instruments are electro mechanical Instruments (F)
(True/False)
5. Pressing TGB and BCB at train sending station transmits
‘Train going (F)
to ‘ to the instrument at the other end
(True/False)
6. After the Instrument at the receiving end in set to TCF & TGT
code (T)
is transmitted back to train sending end
(True/False)
7. When train arrives operation of push button BCB & TCB
simultaneously
at the receiving end reraly in transmission of the Line closed (T)
code to the
train sending end instrument
(True/False)
8. The user had to provide EKT instruments for shunt key and
stop/catch (T)
siding control key where required
(True/False)
9. TOL or Free indication lit on establishment without the
requirement (T)
of BCB or panel lamp Button pressed
(True/False)
10. The Non co-operative feature is destroyed by locking up of (F)
the instrument
(True/False)
11. First step of operational code station with +ve in PB (F)
(True/False)
12. Code for bell is +ve in PB Instrument (T)
(True/False)
13. To cancel ‘Train going to’ condition before the train enter the
233 | P a g e
block (T)
section BCB & LCB must be operated at both station
concurrently
(True/False)
14. Set the Block instrument to line closed when the train pushes
back to the
dispatching station BCB & LCB must be operated at sending (F)
station
concurrently
(True/False)
15. All operational codes are transmitted only when LCB or TGB is
presses with
BCB at the transmitting station (F)
(True/False)
16. ‘Train on line’ Buzzer operates only at the receiving station (T)
(True/False)
17. Train on line code is suppressed by the sending station by
keeping the pressed TGB (T)
(True/False)
18. SNR proves the Normal position of all the signals and their
control
levers/knobs pertaining to that block section (T)
(True/False)
19. Picking up of SNR indirectly proves that shunt key and
slip/catch
siding keys are out position (F)
(True/False)
20. SNR picks up by pressing BCB along with TGB/LCB buttons
(True/False) (T)
nd
21. SNR picks up automatically on receipt of all 2 functioned
pulse (F)
and drops at the end of 3rd pulse
(True/False)
22. Normal position of FVT & LVT are proved in SNR circuit (T)
(True/False)
23. For all functioned SNR relay working is a must (F)
(True/False)
24. Though feed to other relay from the external circuit is
available it does (T)
not pick up however SNR indication is available
(True/False)
25. TAR picks up through external battery (T)
(True/False)
26. TAR de-latches to Normal through line battery once the
instrument (F)
assumes to line closed position
234 | P a g e
(True/False)
27. ASTR picks up once FVT is actuated (F)
(True/False)
28. Dropping of ASTR in TGT position initiates transmission of
Automatic
TOL code (T)
(True/False)
29. ASTR picks up and stock while initiating push back (T)
normalization
(True/False)
30. Non Energization of this relay will not permit the instrument (T)
to change
to TGT even on receipt of answer back TGT code
(True/False)
31. TCKR at transmitting and CRR relay at receiving end are in
series through
to line with the line battery at the transmitting end (T)
(True/False)
32. In the line circuit at the receiving end RCKR front contact is
proves (F)
(True/False)
33. RCKR acts as a code pulse terminator
(True/False) (T)
34. Generator and transmission of a pulse is done
at the transmitting end
while the terminator of a pulse are ordered by (T)
the circuit at the receiving end
(True/False)
35. RCKR prepares the instrument for automatic answer back (T)
(True/False)
36. CTR by its state of energization or deenergization decides
whether the (F)
instrument is receiving or transmitting respectively
(True/False)
37. CTR relay front contact the line battery to lien
while its back contact connect (T)
CRR(R)/CRR (R) to line
(True/False)
38. LCCPR drops when line closed code is received from line (F)
(True/False)
39. Picking up to LCCPR enables to TGTR or TCFR to release and
switches (T)
on CTR for answer back when necessary
(True/False)
40. LCCPR allows line closed code transmission as an automatic
reply code
235 | P a g e
only when to enquiry code is line closed code and (T)
_____________
(True/False)
41. PTR & NTR are used respectively to connect –ve /+ve of the
line battery (F)
on line at the transmitting instrument
(True/False)
42. LR is the relay that is reacted on front by CRR(R) or TCKR while
the (T)
instrument is receiving or transmitting respectively
(True/False)
43. Zener Diode is provided across the condenser of 3CR relay to
have a contact
time delay irrespective of the voltage variation (T)
(True/False)
44. 1 CR os having toe branches one with TCKR and other with
RDR respectively (T)
effective during transmission and reception of code
(True/False)
45. PZR & NZR _____ the polarity of the front pulse of code that is (F)
received
(True/False)
46. When the SM acknowledges the TOL code by pressing BCB to
transmit
a bell code to TOLAR at the sending station __________ and (T)
causes
TOLTR drop to stop the transmission of TOL codes
(True/False)
47. PCR picks up at the end that initiates line closed operation
(True/False) (T)
48. TGTR picks up on successful reception of TCF code and
releases when line
closed code is received (T)
(True/False)
49 TCFR picks up when TCF code is received and releases on
. reception of line
closed code (T)
(True/False)
50 ASCR picks up and locks the signal when cancellation is
. initiated (T)
(True/False)
51 Front contact of ASR
. (True/False)
236 | P a g e
Matching the following
1. Push Button colour Black ( )
2. Train Going to Button colour b) Green ( )
3. Line closed Button colour c) white ( )
4. cancelled Button d) Red ( )
5. Panel lamp Button e) Yellow ( )
6. Shunt key Button f) Blue ( )
7. No drain circuit feature g) SNR ( )
8. ASTR h) Repeate of FVTR ( )
9. CRR I) Polarised Relay ( )
10. TCKR J) Transmission o f code ( )
checking Relay
11. RCKR k) Code reception ( )
checking Relay
12. N2R l) Second -ve pulse ( )
receiving relay
13. PCR m) Relay that changes ( )
pulse
14. CAR n) Cancellation Relay ( )
15. ASCR o) LSS control Relay ( )
16. SCKR p) Low voltage ( )
monitoring Relay
17. ASR q) Advanced station ( )
Relay
18. Q series Relay PBI r) 36 Relays ( )
19. NV1 Relay PBI s) 4 Relays ( )
20. Bell t) +Ve ( )
1 To set the Instrument to TGT the following Buttons ( (c)

)
are to be pressed at the train sending station
a) TGB
b) BCB
c) BCB & TGB simultaneously
d) All the above
2 One of the following is TCF Code ( )
a) - + - b) - - + (a)
c) - - - d) - + +
3 One of the following is TGT code ( )
a)- + - b) - - + (b)
c)- - - d)- + +
4. One of the following is line closed code ( ) (d)
a)- + - b) - - +
c)- - - d)- + +
237 | P a g e
5. Shunt key cannot be extracted in ( ) (a)
a) TCF b) TG
c) Line closed d) TGT – TOL
6. One of the following is TOL code ( ) (c)
a) - + - b) - - +
c)- - - d) - + +
7. When the PB instrument is locked by the SM the ( ) (d)
following is possible
a) To set the instrument to TGT
b) To initiate line closed code
c) To send bell code
d) To transmit receive the TOL code
8. When the PB instrument is locked by the SM the ( ) (d)
following is not possible
a) Transmit TGT code
a) TCF or line closed code
b) Transmit answer back line closed code
c) To initiate line closed code
9. The following is not an external circuit Relay ( ) (d)
a) SNR
b) ASTR
c) TAR
d) RCKR
10. External circuit Relays will not monitor the following ( ) (d)
condition
a) Normal position of Reception and dispatch signals and their
controls
b) Entry/Occupation of Block section by a train
c) Clearing of Block section by a train
d) Normalization of the Block Instrument
11. The following is irrelevant to TAR Relay in PB ( ) (c)
a) External Battery
b) Local Battery
c) Line Battery
d) Magnetic latch
12. The following Relays are picked up by line Battery ( ) (c)
a) TCKR
b) CRR
c) All of the above
d) None of the above
13. The following Relay energised by Local Battery ( ) ( d)
a) TCKR
b) SNR
c) CRR
d) RDR
238 | P a g e
14. The following Relay stores the first pulse of any code ( ) (c )
when it is –Ve
a) RCKR
b) CTR
c) RDR
d) CTPR
15. Picking up of CTR will not prove the following ( ) (d)
a) All reception and dispatch signals pertaining to an
Instrument are Normal
b) No shunting is being carried out in the face of a train
c) SM is Keeping the required button in the pressed condition
d) The conditions are not favourable for answering back
16. The following is not a coding Relays ( ) (b)

a) 2 CR
b) PCR
c) 3CR
d) 1CR
17. The following Relays is not a magnetic latch Relay ( ) (c)
a) TGTR
b) TCFT
c) TOLTR
d) TAR
18 . Picking up of SHKR is not a pre-requisite for ( ) (c)
activation of
a) CTR
b) TCFR
c) PCR
d) TGTR
19. The following is not a button Relay ( ) (b)
a) TGTBR
b) SCKR
c) LCBR
d) BCBR
20 . The following power supplies is not required for PB ( ) (b)
Instrument
a) Local Battery
b) Internal Battery
c) Line Battery
d) External Battery
TRACK CIRCUITS
239 | P a g e
1 (
Train shunt Resistance (TSR) is directly proportional to the (
Relay voltage. T
)
True/False
2 (
Ballast resistance (RB) is directly proportional to the length (
of the Track circuit. F
)
True/False
3 (
Dead section on the point zone shall not be more than 1.8 (
m (6’) for B.G. T
)
True/False
4
The value of the regulating resistance used in the D.C track (
circuit in AC RE area is 0-30 (adjustable) True/False T
)
5 (
Minimum permissible Ballast resistance of a D.C track (
circuit in Block section shall be 2 Ω/ K.M F
)
True/False
6 (
Minimum permissible value of TSR for a D.C track circuit (
shall be 0.5 ohms. T
)
True/False
7 (
Maximum length of DC Track Circuit in AC RE area using (
QBAT is 750 m with B type choke at both ends. T
)
True/False
8 (
The maximum limit of voltage drop across DC track relay of (
QTA2 is up to 300% of its pick up value. T
)
True/False
9 (
The total stray current as measured, shall not exceed 10 (
milliamps if the length of the track circuit is less than T
100metres. )
True/False
10 (
The total stray current as measured, shall not exceed 100 (
milliamps if the length of the track circuit is more than or T
equal to 100metres. )
True/False
11 (
Stray voltage shall not be more than 100mv irrespective of (
length of track circuit. T
)
True/False
240 | P a g e
12 (
The insert to insert resistance of a sleeper should not be (
less than 500 ohms T
)
True/False
13 (
B type choke has impedance Z=120Ω and resistance = 3Ω. (
T
True/False
)
14 (
Insulation Resistance Testing of Glued Joints is done with (
100V DC Megger. T
)
True/False
15 (
Insulation Resistance of a glued joint in Dry condition shall (
not be less than 25 MΩ when a meggering voltage of 100V T
DC is applied across the joint. True/False )
16 (
Insulation Resistance of a glued joint in wet condition shall (
not be less than 3 KΩ. T
)
True/False
17 (
The measured TSR value of a track circuit should be (
always higher than the minimum TSR of 0.5 ohms. T
)
True/False
18 (
Minimum permissible ballast resistance in station yard is 2 (
Ω/Km T
)
True/False
19 (
Minimum permissible ballast resistance out side station (
yard is 1 Ω/Km F
)
True/False
20 (
Track Relay used for track circuit length up to 100 m is ( F )
2.25 Ω
True/False
21 (
Track Relay used for Track Circuit length more than 100 m ( T )
is 2.25 Ω
True/False
22 (
The minimum length of a DC track circuit is 2 rail lengths ( T )
(26m)
True/False
241 | P a g e
23 (
Regulating resistance (Round Type) used in DC track ( T )
circuit of Non-RE area is 0-15 Ω.
True/False
24 (
The DC Track Circuit Regulating Resistance can be made ( F )
zero
True/False
25 (
Ballast Resistance is inversely proportional to Length of ( T )
Track Circuit.
True/False
26 (
When TPR drops, it indicates that the Closed Track Circuit ( F )
is not occupied by the train.
True/False
27 (
Transverse Bonds are provided between Positive Rails in ( F )
DC Single Rail Track Circuit.
True/False
28 (
Transverse Bonds are provided between Negative Rails of (
adjacent DC single rail track circuits. T
)
True/False
29 (
Rail Resistance is directly proportional to the length of The (
Track Circuit. T
)
True/False
30 (
Rail Resistance shall not exceed 0.5 Ω/Km., if Track Circuit (
Length is more than 700 m. T
)
True/False
31 (
Rail Resistance shall not exceed 1.5 Ω/Km., if Track Circuit (
Length is less than 700 m. T
)
True/False
32 (
Under minimum Ballast Resistance condition, for the QBAT (
Track Relay, voltage across the track relay shall not be less F
than 125% of its Rated Pick UP Value. )
True/False
242 | P a g e
33 (
Under minimum Ballast Resistance condition, voltage (
across the track relay shall not be less than 125% of its T
Rated Pick UP Value except for QBAT. )
True/False
34 (
The insert-to-insert resistance of a PSC sleeper should be (
more than 500Ω for use in D.C track circuit. T
)
True/False
35 (
When drop shunt test is done with 0.5ohm resistance the (
relay voltage should not be more than 85% of drop away T
voltage. )
True/False
36 (
As per SEM the availability of GFN liners should be (
ensured up to 97% for proper working of DC track circuit. T
)
True/False
AFTC
1 Where Ballast conditions are poor, AFTC of more than ( ) ( T )
450m length should be of the centre fed version.
True/False
2.
Where Ballast conditions are poor, AFTC of less than ( ) ( T )
450m length shall be of the end fed version.
True/False
3.
Siemens FTGS track circuits are not coded track circuits. ( ) ( F )
True/False
4.
‘S’ bonds are used where Siemens AFTC is followed by ( ) ( F )
ALSTOM AFTC.
True/False
5.
If ALSTOM AFTC is followed by ALSTOM AFTC, ‘S’ ( ) ( T )
bonds can be used.
True/False
6.
In SIEMENS AFTC, 12 different types of carrier ( ) ( T )
frequencies are used.
243 | P a g e
True/False
7.
In SIEMENS AFTC, data signal (modulating signal) is 8- ( ) ( T )
bit pattern
True/False
8.
In SIEMENS AFTC, 8 different types of data signals are ( ) ( F )
available for each carrier frequency.
True/False
9.
In SIEMENS AFTC, receiver-I card checks received ( ) ( T )
signal amplitude and frequency
True/False
10.
Receiver-I card of SIEMENS AFTC is a universal card. ( ) ( F)
True/False
11.
Transmitter card of SIEMENS AFTC is a frequency ( ) ( F )
dependent card i.e. separate card is required for each
frequency.
True/False
12.
Receiver-II card of SIEMENS AFTC is a universal card. ( ) ( T )
True/False
13.
Demodulator card of SIEMENS AFTC is a universal ( ) ( T )
card.
True/False
14.
In SIEMENS AFTC, data verification is done by ( ) ( T )
Receiver-II card
True/False
15.
In SIEMENS AFTC, amplitude assessment is done in ( ) ( T )
amplifier card.
True/False
16.
FTGS-46 is suitable for short length track circuits. ( ) ( F )
True/False
17.
FTGS-917 is suitable for long length track circuits. ( ) ( F )
244 | P a g e
True/False
18.
FTGS-917 is suitable for short length Track circuits ( ) ( T )
True/False
19.
SIEMES AFTC worked on MSK Principle ( ) ( F )
True/False
20.
‘TSR value in the track circuited portion of AFTC is 0.5Ώ ( ) ( T )
True/False
21.
TSR value in the tuned zone portion of AFTC is 0.15 Ώ ( ) ( T )
True/False
22.
Audio Frequency Track Circuit can be a Joint Less Track ( ) ( T )
Circuit except in Point Zone Track Circuit.
True/False
23.
Z’ bonds are used in the turned zone of SIEMENS ( ) ( F )
AFTC.
True/False
24.
ALSTOM AFTC worked on FSK principle ( ) ( F )
True/False
25. In ALSTOM AFTC, only three different types of data
( ) ( T )
signal are available for each carrier frequency.
True/False
26.
DTC-24 is suitable for long length track circuits ( ) ( T )
True/False
TRACK CIRCUITS
1. Maximum voltage of DC track relay(shelf type) should not
exceed -------- of its rated pick up voltage under maximum
ballast resistance and maximum battery voltage.
2. Maximum voltage of DC track relay shall not be less than - - - - -
of its rated pick up value under minimum ballast resistance and
245 | P a g e
minimum battery voltage.
3. Maximum voltage of DC Q-Series track relay (QTA2/QT1)should
not exceed -------- of its rated pick up voltage under maximum
ballast resistance and maximum battery voltage.
4. Voltage at track relay terminals with 0.5 ohm TSR should be less
than 85% of its - - - - - - -- - - - - value.
5. The size of continuity bond wire is - - - - - - .
6. Overhauling period of a shelf type track relay- - - - - - - .
7. The DC resistance of B type choke is - - - - - - - .
8. AC impudence of B type choke is - - - - - .
9. Block joints are to be changed as whole once in a - - - - - - - .
10. Polarity of the supply to the adjacent track circuit is to be - - - - -

-- - .
11. Minimum permissible TSR for DC track circuits is - - - - - -
12. The recommended rail resistance per Kilometre is not more than
-----.
13. The recommended ballast resistance per kilometre in station
section is - - - - - .
14. The recommended ballast resistance per kilometre in Block
section is - - - - - .
15. The clearance between bottom of the rail and ballast is - - - - - - .
16. The insulation resistance of glued joint in dry condition when

100VDC applied across the joint is- - - - - - - - .
17. The insulation resistance of glued joint in wet condition when
100VDC applied across the joint is- - - - - - - - .
18. Formula used to calculate the rail resistance - - -- - - - -.
19. Formula used to calculate the ballast resistance - - -- - - - -.
20. The coil resistance of QBAT relay is - - - - - - -
21. The percentage release of track relay is - - - - - - - .
22. The maximum excitation for DC Q series track relay (QTA2)

should be less than - - -
23. The maximum excitation for DC Q series track relay (QBAT)
should be less than - - -
24. The distance between track circuit termination and fouling mark
shall not be less than - - - -- - - meters.
246 | P a g e
25. The resistance offered by track circuit rails and continuity bonds
is termed as - - - - - - .
26. The resistance offered by ballast and sleepers across the track
circuit is called ---------.
27. Minimum length of DC track circuits is - - - - - - meters.
28. Maximum length of DC track circuits in station section with PSC

sleepers in RE Area is - - -
29. Maximum permissible length of DC track circuits with QBAT
relay in RE Area on PSC sleepers is - - -
30. Maximum length of track circuit with wooden / psc sleepers in
Block section of Non RE Area is - - - - - - -
31. Maximum length of track circuit with wooden / psc sleepers in
Station section of Non RE Area is - - - - - - -
32. Maximum length of track circuit with wooden sleepers in the
station section of RE Area is - -- - - - - - - .
33. The AC immunity level of shelf type track relay is - - - - - - -.
34. The AC immunity level of QBAT relay is - - - - - - -.
35. QSPA1 relay shall be used as repeater relay for - - - - -type track
relay.
36. The minimum resistance of concrete sleepers between insert to
insert is - - - - ohms
37. The rail resistance per kilometer shall not exceed -- -- - - ohms
for track circuits longer than 700meters.
38. The rail resistance of track per kilometer shall not exceed - - - - -
ohms per track circuits less than 700 meters.
39. Only - - - - - type clip shall be used in glued joint portion of track.
40. The minimum permissible ballast resistance per kilometre with in

the station section is - -- - -- - .
41. The minimum permissible ballast resistance per kilometre with in
the Block section is - -- - -- - .
STATE TRUE OR FALSE
1. 1. Train shunt Resistance (TSR) is directly proportional to ( )
the Relay voltage.
2. 2. Ballast resistance (RB) is directly proportional to the ( )
length of the Track circuit.
3. 3. Dead section on the points zone shall not be more than ( )
1.8 m (6’) for B.G.
4. 4. The value of the regulating resistance used in the D.C ( )
track circuit in AC RE area is 0-30 (adjustable)
5. 5. Minimum permissible Ballast resistance of a D.C track ( )
circuit in Block section shall be 2 ohms per k.m.
6. 6. Minimum permissible value of TSR for a D.C track circuit ( )
shall be 0.5 ohms.
7. 7. The distance between two cross bonds shall not be more ( )
247 | P a g e
than 100m, used in D.C. track circuit used in AC RE area.
8. 8. The minimum length of a D.C track circuit is 26 meters (2 ( )
rail lengths) normally.
9. 9. Insulation resistance of a glued joint shall not be less ( )
than 3k ohms in wet condition When meggered with 100
V D.C Megger.
10. 10. Transverse Bonds are provided between negative rail ( )
to negative rail, in continous single rail D.C track circuit
zone
11. 11. Maximum length of DCTC in RE using QBAT is 750 ( )
mtrs.
12. 12. Overhauling of a plug-in type track relay is to be done ( )
once in 15 years
13. 13. ‘B’ type choke is to be provided in DCTC is of 120 ( )
ohms impedance and 3 resistance.
ANSWERS
250%
125%
300%
Rated drop away value
8S.W.G
10-12years
3ohms
120 ohms
12 months
staggered
0.5 ohms
01 ohms
1) 2 ohms
2) 4 ohms
3) 50 mm
4) not less than 25 mega ohms
5) not less than 3 kilo ohms
6) 2(vf-vr) / If + Ir
7) vf +vr / 2(If – Ir)
8) 9 ohms
9) 68%
10) 300%
11) 235%
12) 3 meters
13) Rail resistance
248 | P a g e
14) Ballast resistance
15) 26 meters
16) 350 meters
17) 750 meters
18) 1000 meters
19) 670 meters
20) 450 meters
21) 50 Volts AC
22) 80 Volts AC
23) QTA2/ QBAT
24) 500 Ohms
25) 0.5 ohms
26) `1.5 ohms
27) J type
28) 2 ohms
29) 4 ohms
UNIVERSAL AXLE COUNTERS
State true or False
CHAPTER-1
1 Two sets of Tx / Rx ( True

coils are required at )
one detection point
to establish the
direction of traffic.
True/False
2 Transmitter coils are ( False
always connected )
inside the rail.
True/False
3 Preparatory reset ( True
prepares to reset )
the axle counter and
ensures that the
SM/ASM pilot the
train.
True/False
4 In preparatory reset, ( True
after resetting, axle )
counter continues to
show occupied until
one train movement
in the section carries
out correct
balancing of track
249 | P a g e
section.
True/False
5 In UAC, both the ( True
Transmitter coils )
are connected in
Series.
True/False
6 In analog axle ( True
counter, the receiver )
output signal due to
passage of train is
an amplitude
modulated signal.
True/False
7 In axle counter for ( True
each axle passing )
over detection point
causes a ‘dip’ in the
receiver signal.
True/False
MULTIPLE CHOICE:
CHAPTER-1
1 In UAC, input voltage to EJB and EV is --------------- ( ) ( C)
A) 12V & 24V DC respectively B) 110 V AC

C) 24V DC D) 12V DC
2 In UAC, DC-DC converter output voltages are ____, ( ) (C)
_____ & _______
+5 V, +12V, +12V(ISO) B) +5 V, -12V,
+12V(ISO)
C) +5 V, +10V, +10V(ISO) D) +5 V, -10V,
+10V(ISO)
3 Preparatory reset can be used in case of the ( ) (D)
__________sections provided with axle counters.
A) Main line
B) Section between Advance starter and IBS
C) Block Instrument and BPAC
D) all of these.
CHAPTER-2
MULTIPLE CHOICE:
250 | P a g e
1 In Universal Axle ( (
counters, the minimum ) C
input channel voltage )
coming from EJB
required at Evaluator
CTB is _____ mv AC.
A) 1000 B) 150
C) 175 D)
1500
2 In UAC, Oscillator card ( (
output voltage & ) A
frequency is )
_________
A) 60 VAC & 5KHz
B) 30 VAC & 5KHz
C) 60VAC & 5Hz
D) 30VAC & 5Hz
3 In UAC Receiver coil ( (
output voltage is ) A
__________ )
A) 0.7 to 1.0 V AC
B) 60 VAC
C) 1.0 to 1.2 V DC
D) 105 to 110mv AC
4 In UAC Transmitter coil ( (
current is ) C
____________ )
A) 100 milli Amps

B) 3 to 5 micro Amps
C) 420 milli Amps
D) 420 micro Amps
5 In UAC Receiver card ( (
out put voltage is ) A
_______________ )
A) 1.2 to 1.5 V AC
B) 60 VAC
C) 1.2 to 1.5 V DC
D) 105 to 110mv AC
6 In UAC, Dip voltage ( (
measured at the ) B
Receiver output coil )
shall be not more than
------ of its normal
value.
A ) 90% B) 10%
C) 15%
D) 85%
251 | P a g e
7 Minimum spacing ( (
between sleepers for ) A
fixing Tx / Rx is )
_______
A) 550 mm B)
200mm C)
800mm D)
400mm
8 Minimum length of ( (
Track circuit required ) A
for trolley protection on )
either side of a
detection point in
single Line section is
__________________
mtrs
A)5 Rail lengths
B) 3 Rail lengths
C) 8 Rail lengths
D) 9 Rail lengths
9 Relays used for EVR & ( (
SUPR are of ) A
______________ )
neutral line relays
A) QS3 type & 12V DC
B) QS3 type & 24V
DC
C) QN1 type & 12V DC
D) QNA1 type & 12V
DC
1 For connecting the ( (
0 output of electronic ) D
junction box to )
evaluator, the following
cables are to be used
depending upon the
distance between the
two and whether to be
used in R.E. or non
R.E. Area.
A) 4 quad axle counter

cable as per
specification No. TC-
30 for RE & TC-31 for
Non-RE
B) PET quad of main
telecom cable as per
specification No.TC-
14/75
252 | P a g e
C)Polythene jelly filled
telephone cable as per
specification No.TC-41
/90.
D) All of these
State true or False
1 In universal or ( ( F)
multi entry axle )
counter evaluator
consists of 8No.s
of cards including
Power Supply
card.
True/False
2 Main purpose of ( ( T)
trolley )
suppression
track circuit is to
prevent the
conversion of
pulses from the
dip caused by
trolley wheel.
True/False
3 In Universal Axle ( ( T)
counter, the )
transmitter signal
frequency is 5
KHz
True/False.
4 In Universal Axle ( ( F)
counter, with one )
evaluator unit
maximum 8
detection points
can be
connected.
True/False
5 In Universal axle ( ( T)
253 | P a g e
counters, we )
have an option to
select either
Preparatory
Reset or
Conditional Hard
Reset in Logic
Card used for A,
B, C, D channels.
True/False
6 Trolley ( ( T)
suppression )
track circuit is
provided in card
no. 4 for ABCD
channels.
True/False
7 Trolley (
suppression )
track circuit is
provided in card
no. 5 for EFGH
channels
True/False
8 Logic card for ( ( T)
ABCD channel is )
card no 5.
True/False
9 Channel voltage ( ( T)
after attenuator )
pads of card no 1
&2 is 105mv AC.
True/False
1 SUPR & EVER ( ( T)
0 are controlled )
through card
no.9.
254 | P a g e
True/False
1 Transmitter & ( ( T)
1 Receiver cables )
should be put in
HDPE pipe for
safety and laid at
a depth of >1
meter from
bottom of rail.
True/False
1 Axle counter ( ( F)
2 Transmitter )
cables and
receiver cables
of individual track
devices can be
laid in same pipe.
True/False
CHAPTER - 3
SSDAC- CEL
State true or False
1 In CEL single section digital axle (
counters, event logger card is F
optional with each set of axle )
counters used for monitoring the one
track section.
True/False
2 Phase reversal modulation technique (
is used in digital axle counters to T
avoid the trolley suppression track )
255 | P a g e
circuit.
True/False
3 In SSDAC of CEL make, SCC-1 (
generates the frequencies of 21KHz T
carrier signals, which is transmitted )
to 1ST set of Tx coils.
True/False
4 In SSDAC of CEL make, SCC-2 (
generates the frequencies of 21KHz F
carrier signals, which is transmitted )
to 2nd set of Tx coils.
True/False
5 In SSDAC of CEL make, when the (
train wheel passes over the axle T
detectors, the Rx signal gets phase )
modulated.
True/False
6 In SSDAC of CEL make, the SCC (
conditions the modulated signal and T
demodulates it to generate valid train )
pulses.
True/False
MULTIPLE CHOICE:
1 SSDAC used with block ( (

working, type of reset C
used is ________ ) )
A) Direct Hard Reset
B) Conditional
Hard Reset
C) Preparatory Reset
D) Any one
these can be used
2 In SSDAC of CEL ( (
make, card no 5 is B
_________ ) )
A) Modem Card.
B) Event Logger Card.
C) Micro controller
Logic Board
D) Relay Driver Card.
make, card no 6 is A
_________ ) )
A) Modem Card.
C) Micro controller
Logic Board
256 | P a g e
make, card no 7 is D
_________ ) )
A) Modem Card.
C) Micro controller
Logic Board
make, card no 8 is C
________ ) )
A) Modem Card.
C) DC-DC Converter
Card
make, card no 1&2 are B
_________ ) )
A) Modem Card.
B) Signal Conditioning
Cards.
C) Micro controller
Logic Boards
make, card no 3&4 are C
_________ ) )
A) Modem Card.
B) Signal Conditioning
Cards.
C) Micro controller
Logic Boards
make, _______ no. of A
conductors required for ) )
connecting two SSDAC
units.
A) 2 B) 4
C) 8
D) 10
9 Baud rate of modem ( (
card in SSDAC of CEL C
is -------------------------- ) )
A) 56KBPS
B) 3000BPS
C) 300 BPS
257 | P a g e
D) 9600BPS
0 make, the function of D
the Micro-controller ) )
Logic Board card is
A) Wheel detection
B) Train direction is
checking and Wheel
counting.
C) Receives the remote
wheel count and
computes the status of
the section for clear or
occupied.
D) all of these
1 make, Input voltage of C
the DC-DC converter ) )
Card is
A) 12V DC B) 110V AC
C) 24V DC D) 110V DC
2 make, output voltages C
of the DC-DC converter ) )
Card is
A) 5V DC & 12V DC
B) 5V DC & 24V DC
C) Both A & B
D) None of these
CHAPTER - 4
SSDAC- ELDYNE
1 Amplitude modulation ( (
technique is used in ) F)
digital axle counters to
avoid the trolley
suppression track
circuit.
True/False
2 SSDAC- ELDYNE ( (
(AzLS) is containing 2 ) T
out of 2 micro- )
controllers to count the
axles, establish the
track occupancy of a
track section.
258 | P a g e
True/False
3 The AzLS, consisting ( (
double rail contact ) T
Sk30H and an )
electronic unit.
True/False
4 In AzLS, Analog card of ( (
Electronic Unit ) T
generates Tx signal, )
Amplifies Rx signal,
does phase sensitive
rectification and also
generates wheel pulse
of MESSAB and
RADIMP.
True/False
5 In AzLS, Digital card of ( (
Electronic Unit Counts ) T
wheel pulse, )
Determines RCD,
Supervises Rail
Contact, Codes
telegrams.
True/False
6 AzLS can be configured ( (
as a single section axle ) T
counter with one Rail )
Contact (RC) and
Electronic Control Unit
(EAK) combination at
both ends of the section
and with a two-wire
fault tolerant link (FTL)
between the two.
True/False
7 In AzLS, additional ( (
Digital PCB or evaluator ) F
card is not required to )
be used at the common
detection point (EAK).
True/False
8 AzLS could be ( (
configured in a double ) T
section application )
including point zone
application.
259 | P a g e
True/False
MULTIPLE CHOICE:
1 Baud rate in SSDAC of ( (

ELDYNE (AzLS) is ) C
---------- )
A) 56KBPS
B) 3000BPS
C) 300 BPS
D) 9600BPS
2 In AzLS, EAK consists ( (
of ____________ ) D
)
A) Back plane
B) Evaluator board
C) Analog board
D) all of these
CHAPTER- 5
MSDAC
State true or False
1 axle detectors do not ( (

detect push trolley with ) T
4 / 6 / 8 spokes. )
True/False
2 In CEL MSDAC, Each ( (
field unit is connected to ) T
Central Evaluator on )
half Quad cable in Star
Configuration.
True/False
MULTIPLE CHOICE:
1 Multi-section Digital Axle ( (

Counter system consists ) D
260 | P a g e
of ______________ )
A) Detection Point
B) Central Evaluator
Unit and Reset Unit
C) Relay Unit and Event
logger and diagnostic
terminal
D) All of these
2 In MSDAC, Central ( (
Evaluator unit drives ) A
_______ Vital Relay in )
order to give Free and
occupied indication of
an axle counter track
section.
A) 24VDC, 1000 ohms
Plug-in type
B) 12VDC, 1000 ohms

Shelf type
C) 110VAC, 1000 ohms
Plug-in type
D) None of these.
3 In CEL MSDAC, each ( (
Digital Axle counter field ) D
unit _____________ )
A) is configured as one
Detection point.
B) Detects wheels and
store counts based on 2
out of 2 logic.
C)Transmits count and
health information to
Central Evaluator.
D) All of these
CHAPTER 6 & 7 MAY BE SHIFTED to ANNEXURES.

DATALOGGER
MULTIPLE CHIOCES
SL.No. Question ( ) Answ
261 | P a g e
er
1 In EFFTRONICS Datalogger, capacity of each Digital input card is ____ ( C
inputs. )
A) 16 B) 32 C) 64 D) 512
2 In EFFTRONICS Datalogger, capacity of each Analog input card is ( B
_________ no. of analog channels. )
A) 16 B) 8 C) 4 D) 2
3 In EFFTRONICS Datalogger, all Digital inputs are scanned at the rate of ( A
______ m. sec. )
A) 16 B) 32 C) 64 D) 512
4 In EFFTRONICS Dataloggers, all the Analog inputs are scanned at the ( B
rate of ------------. )
A) 16 m.sec B) less than 1 sec.
C) 32 m.sec D) 1 minute
5 In EFFTRONICS Dataloggers, DSU is required only when the system is ( C
required to be connected with more than ______ no. of relays. )
A) 64 B) 128 C) 512 D) 1024

6 Digital input capacity of Datalogger system is ____________. ( D
)
A) 512B) 1024 C) 64 D) 4096
7 Analog input capacity of Datalogger system is ____________. ( B
)
A) 24 B) 96 C) 64 D) 32
8 Minimum no. of Analog channels is required to be provided with ( C
datalogger system is ___________ )
A) 16 B) 24 C) 32 D) 96
262 | P a g e
9 Minimum no. of Digital inputs are required to be provided with ( C
datalogger system is ___________ )
A) 64 B) 256 C) 512 D) 4096

10In EFFTRONICS Datalogger, each DSU is provided with maximum of ( B
_________ no. of digital input cards. )
A) 16 B) 8 C) 4 D) 2
No.Question An
sw
er
1 Data logger records data of analog signals & digital signals. ( ) True
True/False
2 Data loggers cannot be connected on network ( F
) alse
True/False
3 For making reports, printing of data is possible locally as well as at ( T

) rue
centralized place
True/False
263 | P a g e
4 Relay data is stored with respective to date and time in the datalogger ( T
) rue
system, only when there is a change in status of the relay.
True/False
5 In networking of Dataloggers modems are required to be provided. ( T

) rue
True/False
6 In networking of Dataloggers, “ORG” Modem of one station can be ( F
) alse
connected to “ORG” Modem of the adjacent station.
True/False
7 In networking of Dataloggers, FEP is required at Centralised Place, where ( T
) rue
you want to monitor the data of all the stations.
True/False
8 In networking of Efftronics Dataloggers, Central Monitoring Unit is provided ( T
) rue
with Nmdl, Fault entry, Reports and Track OFF software.
True/False
9 Datalogger stores 10Lakhs events. ( T
) rue
True/False
10 In EFFTRONICS Datalogger, each ASU is provided with maximum of 4 no. ( F
) alse
of analog input cards.
True/False
11 Dataloggers are very much useful for accident analysis ( T
) rue
True/False
12 With the help of datalogger, Train Signal passing at Danger events may not ( F
) alse
be analysed.
True/False
13 With the help of datalogger, Speed of a Train can be analysed ( T
) rue
True/False
14 With the help of datalogger, Un-Signal Movement can be analysed. ( T
) rue
True/False
15 ( T
) rue
With the help of datalogger, power supply fluctuations can be analysed
True/False
16 ( T
) rue
In AWS, opto coupler card senses the aspects information of signal and connects
the same to track magnet.
True/False
17 ( T
) rue
In AWS, Engine Magnet transmits 50Hz and 100Hz frequencies to
Track Magnet.
True/False
18 ( F
) alse
In AWS, Track magnet works on 24V DC.
264 | P a g e
True/False
19 AWS applies brakes whenever Driver passed signal at Danger. ( T
) rue
True/False
20 ( T
) rue
AWS continuously monitors train speed and direction of movement.
True/False
21 ( T
) rue
ACD prevents train collision in the mid section and station sections.
True/False
22 ( T
) rue
ACD is having Door –Drishti of 3 Kms in all Weather conditions.
True/False
23 ( T
) rue
ACDs are provided with Radio Modems for Inter-communication
between them.
True/False
24 ( F
) alse
In ACD, UHF radio modem communication is used for tracking the train.
True/False
25 ( T
) rue
ACD detects Train Parting.
True/False
26 ( T
) rue
ACD alerts driver on 'Station Approach'.
True/False
27 Alerting the driver and regulating the train speed to 25KMPH, when it ( T
) rue
detects (through the Loco ACD of other train) that it has stopped in mid-
section.
True/False
28 ( T
) rue
TPWS facilitates to run the train at maximum permitted speed by providing the
indication to the driver 500 meters in advance of signal.
True/False
29 ( )True
TPWS facilitates to run the train at maximum permitted speed by providing the
indication to the driver 500 meters in advance of signal.
265 | P a g e
True/False
30 TPWS facilitates normal operation of train in dense foggy condition where ( T
) rue
visibility is near zero.
True/False
QUESTION BANK IN POWER PLANT (T-10A):
OBJECTIVE: BATTERIES:
1) I.S. Specification number of battery graded Con.Sulphuric acid __________ (IS266-
1977)
1) I.S. Specification number of Battery graded Distilled water is__________(IS1069)
2) I.S. Specification number of acid resistant paint is___________.(
3) I.S. Specification number of Plante positive Lead acid cells __________.
4) I.S. Specification number of pasted plates Lead Acid cells __________.
5) I.S. Specification number of tubular positive Lead Acid cells __________.
6) I.S. Specification number of Dry Leclanche cell is ____________.
7) I.R.S. Specification number of Auto/Manual battery charger ___________.
8) I.S. Specification number of Ni- Cd rechargeable pocket plated batteries
is______________.
9) I.R.S. Specification of Low maintaince lead acid batteries is__________.
10) I.R.S. Specification number of SMF lead acid batteries is_____________.
11) Voltage of a fully charged Lead Acid cell is______________.
12) Lead Acid cell can be discharged up to voltage of ____________.
13) Separators prevents ____________ between _______ & __________ plates in Lead
Acid cell.
14) The active materials in Lead acid cell are ___________, ________ &_____________.
15) A 400Ahcapacity Lead Acid cell can be charged with a maximum current of
___________.
16) Capacity of any Lead Acid cell is given in___________ with ________ Hrs rating.
17) Electrolyte used in Lead Acid cell is _______ _____________.
18) Specific gravity of battery graded Con. Sulphuric Acid is ____________.
19) Initial charging current rate can be taken as _______% of its capacity in case of L,A,
cells if manufacturer’s rating is not available.
20) Maximum electrolyte temperature allowed during Initial charging of Lead Acid Cell
is__________ºC.
21) Electrolyte for lead acid cell can be prepared by adding _________ to __________ in
small quantities.
22) To avoid lead corrosion on battery connectors and terminals apply ______________ or
_______________.
23) Per cell voltage in case of Float charging is_________.
24) Per cell voltage in case Boost charging is___________.
25) The rate of self discharge in case of Lead Acid cell can be taken as______ per AH.
266 | P a g e
26) Specific gravity of electrolyte varies with temperature at the rate of ___________ per
1ºC.
27) The measuring instrument used for measuring Specific gravity is _____________.
28) Sulphation can be identified by ____________ & ___________.
29) Sulphation in Lead Acid cell increases ___________________ in Lead Acid Cell.
30) In VRLA cell/battery the compensation of distilled water is by _________________.
31) In VRLAB the pressure inside is regulated by ___________.
32) ____________ indicates the fully charged condition of Lead Acid cell.
33) Internal resistance is maximum at _________ Specific gravity.
34) If temperature increases the specific gravity _____________ in Lead Acid Cell.
35) After discharge, both the plates becomes ________ in Lead Acid Cell,
36) The level of electrolyte above the plates should be always_________.
37) Buckling of plates in Lead Acid cell is due to _________________ of plates.
38) During Initial charging, the charging can be stopped only after ____ % of AH input is fed.
39) The insulating pieces between positive and negative plates of a cell are called as
_____________.
40) The ratio of Acid to Distilled water to get 1200 Specific gravity electrolyte is______:
________.
41) Voltage of a fully charged Nickle Cadmium cell is __________ .
42) Electrolyte used in Ni-Cd cell is _____________.
43) The active material on +ve plates in Ni-Cd cell is _________________.
44) The active material on –ve plates in Ni-Cd cell is _________________.
45) When Ni- Cd cell is discharged the Cadmium Hydroxide is reduced to
__________________.
46) In Ni-Cd cell, the Lithium hydroxide is added to electrolyte to
________________________.
47) In Ni-Cd cell the plate grids are made from _________ _______ ________
_______________.
48) Specification number of sealed cylindrical Ni-Cd cell is ______________.
49) Capacity range of pocket plated Ni-Cd cell is ________________.
50) The material used for separators in Ni-Cd cell is __________________.
51) In Automatic Battery charger the output controlling device is ______________.
52) Recommended current rating of charger for an 80AH battery with maximum permissible
load of 12 Amps is ___________ Amps.
53) Automatic battery charger under S-86/20000 specification can
supply constant output voltage for A.C. input variation from ________V
to ______ V.
55) The rectifier circuit converts ___________ to ___________.
55) In case of Ferro resonant type automatic regulator for sudden changes of input voltage
or Load variation the response time is < ____________.
56) In case of Ferro resonant type automatic regulator short circuit protection is achieved
by__________________ winding.
57) Voltage of a Solar cell is ____________ .
59) Charging current should be reduced when the battery starts _____________.
59) Per cell voltage in case of Initial charging is_____________.
60) Per cell voltage in case of Boost charging is____________
61) Per cell voltage in case of Float charging is_____________.
62) In case of Ni-Cd cell/Battery , charge input during first charge should be __________
capacity of C5 AH.
63) ____________ are formed on the plate surphase , when Sulphated.
267 | P a g e
64) Note down ___________ ____________ of each cell periodically.
65) The material used for grids in MFB is __________________.
66) Topping up with distilled water in case of HDP plante Lead Acid cells can be done once
in ________months.
67) Terminal voltage of a fully discharged Ni-Cd cell is____________.
68) When the Lead Acid cell is discharged completely, both the plates are converted into
____________ .
69) The material used for grid structure in Lead Acid cell is______________.
70) The insulation resistance of Mains transformer in battery charger should be more than
____________ M Ohms.
71) In battery charger the current rating of Diodeds & SCR’s should be more than
____________ current flowing through them.
72) The resistors power rating, used in battery charger should be __________.
73) Voltage rating of capacitors used in chargers should be _______٪ above peak value.
74) I.S. Specification number of HRC fuses is ______________.
75) Additional protection for chargers rated above 50 Amps shall be provided with extra
_____________ & ___________.
76) Ripple in D.C. output of battery charger should be less than_________٪
77) Psophometric noise voltage in the output of a battery charger should be less than
__________ Mv.
78) The charger works in ________________ condition, if battery draws current less than
5% of its set value.
79) The charger switches to ____________ when the battery draws currewnt more than 8-
12% of the set current.
80) Power factor of an Automatic battery charger must be above _______ lagging in all
modes.
81) No load AC input current shall be __________ value in case of Automatic battery
charger.
82) In Automatic battery charger the gate pulses for SCR’s is generated by ____________
circuit.
83) In case of Automatic battery charger permitted variation in the output voltage over the
entire range of input AC supply variation is ___________.
84) The grid structure of Lead Acid cell is made from _________________ or
________________alloy.
85) Permissible raise in temperature above amient for Mains Transformer shall be
__________.
86) ON/OFF switch in battery charger shall be of _____________ pole type.
87) The range of voltage control potentio meter in a battery charger shall be___________ to
__________ V.
88) In chargers above 50Amps rating series fuses to be provided for ______________ &
____________ elements.
89) Specific gravity of electrolyte ____________ when temp decreases.
90) Specific gravity correction factor per 1ºC is___________.
91) Equavalising charging is necessary to a battery connected in ___________ charging .
100) Use of ballast resistance in a battery charger is_______________.
101) Check _________, __________, ________ for every 8Hours

during initial charging
102) Voltage of a Secondary cell depends on ______________ & ______________
103) A 300 AH 10H battery can supply 20 Amps current for ___________ number of hours.
268 | P a g e
104) IS Specification of a plante positive type cells is ________________ (IS-1652)
105) IS Specification of Tubular positive type cells is _____________. (IS-1651)
107) Specific gravity correction factor per 1ºC is _____________.
108) Negative plates are one more than the positive plates to provide
______________________.
109) Vent holes are provided in vent cap to for ____________ to ______________.
110) The level of electrolyte in Lead Acid Cell is indicated by ____________________.
111) The level of electrolyte inside the cell is always be _______ '' above the plates.
112) The current inside the cell is carried by _____________.
113) The separators used in VRLAB are made from _______________.
114) The grid in VRLAB are made from _______________ alloy.
115) The normal battery operating temperature is ________ºC.
116) SMF cells need much addition of distilled water due to _________________ principle.
INVERTER:
1) The electronic device which converts AC to DC is called as
_______________.
2) Inverter converts ____________ to ___________.
3) Efficiency range of an inverter should be within _________% to __________
%,
4) Output frequency of inverter should be _____________
5) In case of solid state inverter no load current shall not exceed _______% of
full load current.
6) Inverters of 500VA and above shall be provided with __________&
__________ indications.
7) The PWM IC number used in 500 Watts inverter is ______________.
8) SG2535A is an _______________________________ I.C.
9) EMI/RFI filter is connected on the ______________ side of the inverter.
10) The inverter automatically shuts off when battery voltage goes below
___________ volts.
11) The inverter will be in OFF condition when mains A.C. supply is
___________.
12) The Oscillator frequency inside the SG3525A I.C. is ________ Hz.
13) The power amplifier stage in inverter uses _______________ as power
amplifier device.
14) MCCB means____________ _______ __________ ___________.
15) The changeover time to inverter during Mains power failure is in ________
16) Shut- off input to IC SG3525A is given to pin No_______________.
17) The insulation resistance of the inverter shall not be less
than_________M Ohms under 40ºC.
Solar cells:
1) Solar cells converts __________ energy to _________-- energy.
2) Solar panel is a combination of _________ connected in ___________ & __________
fashion.
3) The solar cell is made from __________ & ______________ materials.

4) Generation of electricity from Sun light is called as________________
5) A typical Solar cell is nothing but __________________
6) Conversion efficiency of a Silicon solar cell is _________________.
269 | P a g e
7) Falling of dust, dirt and snow, decreases the Solar arrays ___________
8) A solar panel is installed inclined at an angle equal to the _____________
of the plane.
9) Surface of solar cell is coated with ________________ coating to increase
_____________.
10) Open circuit voltage of a solar cell is _______ V.
Say TRUE or FALSE:

1) Hexagonal shape of a solar cell provides more utilization area ( )
2) Solar cell converts “Electrical energy” into “Solar energy” ( )
3) Solar panel is a combination of solar cells ( )
4) Voltage of each solar cell is 1.2 V( )
5) Solar cells are made from semiconductor materials ( )
6) The semiconductor material used for solar cell is Aluminium ( )
7) Solar cell produces pollution ( )
8) Efficiency of a Solar cell is very high ( )
9) Solar system is having longer life ( )
10) Conventional Lead Acid Cells are suitable for Solar panel ( )
Uninterrupted power supply (UPS):
1) In Off-Line UPS the inverter is ON only when the mains supply __________.
2) Change over time in ON-line UPS is _____________ mS
4) ____________ of batteries are preferred in UPS.

5) Regulation of output voltage is done by using __________ principle in UPS
6) Normal PF rating of UPS is ________
7) In ON-Line UPS the battery will be always in ___________ condition.
8) __________ or __________ device are used in Power Amplifier stage of UPS.
Say TRUE or FALSE:

1) In Off-Line UPS the inverter is always in ‘ON’ condition ( )
2) In ON-Line UPS there is no change over time ( )
3) In put to UPS is A.C ( )
4) In OFF-Line UPS the relay will be OFF condition when AC input
is present ( )
5) UPS backup time can be increase by increasing the capacity of
the battery ( )
6) Only a single transformer is sufficient in ON-Line UPS ( )
7) In OFF-Line UPS the battery will be charge only when the inverter is ON( )
8) For UPS with rating higher than 2KVA IGBT device is used in power amplifier
stage( )
270 | P a g e
Choose correct answer:
1) The backup time in UPS depends on,

( ) A) Load B) Voltage C) Batter capacity D) all the three
2) The type of UPS used in Medical side is,

( ) A) ON-Line B) OFF-Line C) Line interactive D) Non of the above
3) Malfunctioning of UPS is avoided by incorporating,

( ) A) Fuse B) EMI/RFI filter C) Only filter D) controlling device
4) Input to an UPS is,
( ) A) Battery B) AC mains voltage C) rectifier output D) non of above
SMPS:
1) The switching & controlling element in SMPS is ___________________.

2) The output voltage of SMPS is regulated by,
( ) A) converter transformer B) pulse width of controlling pulses
C) input rectifier D) filter circuit
3) SMPS of 100 Amps rating requires 3 SMR modules of each rating ,

( ) A) 50Amps B) 25 Amps C) 100 Amps d) any value
4) The switching device used in SMPS is ,

( ) A) transistor B) IGBT C) MOSFET D) Diode
5) The switching device in SMPS operates at,
( ) A) above 100KHz B) VF range C) 10-100 KHz D) 10-100MHz
6) The converter transformer in SMPS operates at low frequency ( )
12) The switching device in SMPS will be in always On condition ( )
13) SMPS is a modular type power supply ( )
Say TRUE or FALSE :-

1) The grids and separators will be effected if the specific gravity of electrolyte is
below 1.240 ( )
2) The internal resistance is minimum at specific gravity 1.240 in Lead Acid cell
( )
3) Capacity of a Lead Acid cell is directly proportional to its length of service ( )
4) The Initial charging current is less than normal charging current ( )
5) Electrolyte can be prepared by adding distilled water to Sulphuric Acid( )
6) During Initial charging add only distilled water ( )
7) The battery which is kept continuously under “Float charging” should be given
“ Equavalising charge” to compensate low or uneven Sp. Gravities of cells ( )
8) Buckling is one of the causes for internal short circuit ( )
271 | P a g e
9) The internally short circuited cell gasses freely ( )
10) Buckling of cell plates takes place due to excessive charging or
discharging ( )
11) Shedding means falling of active material from the plates ( )
12) Do not allow the batteries to get fully discharged ( )
13) Boost charging charges the battery quickly ( )
14) The internally short leads to reverse polarity of the cell ( )
15) Formation of lead corrosion at cell terminals causes high resistance ( )
16) Rate of Trickle charging is 100 mA/AH capacity.
17) Distilled water to be added in MFB ( )
18) Initial charging is a constant potential type of charging ( )
19) Gas recombination principle is used in maintaince free sealed L.A. battery
( )
20) Constant potential method is used to charge VRLA battery ( )
21) Voltage of a fully charged Ni-Cd cell is 2.1 V( )
22) Distilled water to be added during initial charging to maintain the level ( )
23) Initial charging can be stopped before 50% of charging is completed ( )
24) Trickle charging is given to a fully discharged battery ( )
25) Boost charging is a constant potential type of charging ( )
26) The nominal cell voltage of a MFB lead acid battery is 2V ( )
27) Calcium alloy is having lower self discharge and increased conductivity ( )
28) Maximum electrolyte temperature allowed during charging is 100ºC ( )
29)The active material on the positive plates in Lead Acid cell is
Spongy Lead ( )
30) Con. Sulphuric Acid is used as electrolyte in Lead Acid Cell ( )
31) Secondary cell voltage depends on the number of plates ( F )

32) Ampere-Hour efficiency can be increaswd by controlling thje charging current
( T )
33) Efficiency of a secondary battery is defind as the ratio of input devided by
output ( F )
DG Set:
1) The D.G. Set converts _____________energy into ______________ energy.

2) In Diesel engine the ___________ is compressed in the cylinder.
3) During ______________ stroke the power is transmitted to the crank shaft.
4) The liquid fuel is sprayed into the cylinder by ____________.
5) The out-put voltage of generator is controlled by controlling the
______________ of the shaft.
6) The speed of the Diesel engine is controlled by providing ________________
on the engine shaft.
7) The fuel used in Diesel engine is __________ oil.
272 | P a g e
II. CHOOSE CORRECT ANSWER:
1) The paper element of fuel filter is to be changed for every,
( ) A)250 Hrs B) 500 Hrs C) 800 Hrs D) 50 Hrs
2) Speed of the prime mover at full load is,
( ) A) 1200 RPM B) 1560 RPM C) 1570 RPM D) 1500 RPM
3) Engine starts and stops due to,
( ) A) Fuel tank filled completely B) air in fuel lines C) piston defective
D) non of the above
4) Compression ratio in Diesel engine is,
( ) A) 16:1 B) 1:16 C) 10:1 D) 5:1
5) Both the valves are closed during.
( ) A) suction stroke B) compression stroke C) exhaust stroke D) non of
the above
7) The valves in DG set are lifted by,

( ) A) Cams on cam shaft B) piston C) crank shaft D) non of the above
8) Engine starts but stops after some time due to,

( ) A) Air in fuel line B) Oil tank is full C) piston faulty D) non of the three
9) The fuel in diesel engine is ignited by,

( ) A) spark plug B) Compression C) piston D) Non of the three
10) Lubricating oil in Diesel engine is located at,

( ) A) Tank B) piston C) Sump D) non of the three
11) The fuel filter in Diesel engine is to be replace after,

( ) A) 500 Hrs B) 800 Hrs C) 1000 Hrs D) 500 Hrs
III. Say TRUE or FALSE:-
1) Spark ignition system is required in diesel engine ( )

2)Fuel tank in diesel engine should be cleaned for every 250 hours
of working ( )
3) Excessive fuel consumption is due to incorrect value of fuel timing ( )
4) The exhaust valve opens during power stroke ( )
273 | P a g e
5) Governor throttle regulates the amount of fuel supplied to the
engine ( )
18) The diesel engine is to be overhauled for every 500 Hours ( )

19) The power is transmitted to alternator by camshaft in diesel engine ( )
20) The valves are opened by livers in diesel engine ( )
IV) MATCH THE FOLLOWING:
( ) 1. Injector A) low ESR filter capacitors
( ) 2. Piston B) stores mechanical energy
( ) 3. Radiator C) charge/discharge system
( ) 4. Fly wheel D) Cooling system
( ) 5. SMPS E) compress the air
( ) 6. Linear power supply F) spray liquid fuel
( ) 7. Micro wave station G) low efficiency
( ) 8. clean the air filter H) after 250 Hrs
( ) 9. change the air filter I) for every 50 hrs

element
( ) 10. Clean the sump J) after 800 Hrs
CABLES
Fill in the blanks:

1.RE cables VF quads are ---------- insulated.
2.PET quads are used for----------in RE main cable.
3.The characteristic impedance of PET quads is--------.
4.Loading section length of RE main cable is--------.
5.Screening factor of lead sheathed cable is--------.
6.RDSO specification 6 quad jelly filled cable is --------.
7.SWBD cables are used for--------- wiring.
274 | P a g e
8. The inductance value of loading coil used in RE main cable is---------.
9) Impedance of paper insulated pair of RE cable is ________________.
10) Value of loading coil used in 6Quad cable is _____________
11) The instrument used to measure the capacitance unbalance in cable is known as
____________.
12) At road crossings the cables should be drawn through ________________.
13) The cable used for emergency purpose is called as _________________
14) Before laying the cable should be tested for proper _____________ &
_________________.
STATE TRUE OR FALSE:

1) Conductor dia of re derivation cable is 0.9mm ( )
2) RDSO specification for RE main cable IRSTC30/97 ( )
3) Quad cables are not used in Non-RE area ( )
4) 6 quad cable loading section length is 2 km ( ).
5) 6 quad cable is paper insulated ( )
6) Emergency control post is provided for every 1 km. ( )
7) Loop resistance of 6 quad cable is 600 ohms ( )
8) RE main cables are aluminum sheathed ( )
CHOOSE CORRECT ANSWER:

1) Loop resistance of 1 Km RE main cable is ,
( ) (A) 560 Ohms (B) 56 Ohms (C) 0.56 Ohms (D) 470 Ohm
2) The purpose of Armour in RE cable is,
( ) (A) mechanical protection (B) to screen the induced voltages
© protection from moisture (D) protection from soil
3) Distance of Loading coil joint in a Loading section in RE section is,
( ) (A) 915 mtrs (B) 1830 Mtrs (C) 457 Mtrs (D) 200 Mtrs
4) The purpose of Al screened wires in 6Q cable is,

( ) (A) mechanical protection (B) to screen the induced voltages
© protection from rats (D) protection from soil
5)The insulation test on RE cable is to be carried out for every,
( ) (A) 3 Months (B) 1 Month (C) 6 Months (D) non of the above
6) Switch board cable is used for ,

( ) (A) Indoor (B) Outdoor (C) both places (D) under ground
275 | P a g e
276 | P a g e
CHAPTER XXIX
BOOKS OF REFERENCE
29.1 BOOKS OF REFERENCE : Books of reference should be supplied to Officers, Supervisors
and Maintainers for their personal use, as well as for use in their offices.
A statement showing the various books and their distribution is at Annexure A. For the officers,
this list should be read in conjunction with Para 8.17 of Indian Railways
Signal Engineering Manual, Part 1 (1988 edition)
29.2 RESPONSIBILITY : All officials to whom books of reference have been

supplied shall be responsible for:
a. their safe custody and good order,

b. pasting all addenda and corrigenda slips promptly and seeing that these are up to
date to the last slip as notified from time to time, and
c. returning all books issued to them for personal use prior to retirement or
resignation or transfer from the railway service.
29.3 INSPECTION : Each Senior Divisional Signal & Telecommunication

Engineer/ Divisional Signal & Telecommunication Engineer shall make periodical checks to
see that Inspectors maintain their books of reference up to date and in good order. Each
Inspector shall, likewise, see that the staff under him maintain their books of reference up-to-
date and in good order.
29.4 ACCOUNTAL : All books of reference should be accounted for in the same way
as tools and plant items.
29.5 REPORTS OF TELECOMMUNICATION STANDARD COMMITTEE,
TECHNICAL PAPERS AND JOURNALS : Each Senior Divisional Signal &
Telecommunication Engineer / Divisional signal & Telecommunication Engineer
should arrange to have the under-mentioned technical literature in his office library :
a. Reports of Telecommunication Standards Committee Meetings.
b. Proceedings & Technical papers issued by Institution of Telecom Engineers,

India, Institute of Electronics & Telecommunication Engineers, Institution of
Railway Signal & Telecommunication Engineers.
c. All IRS Specifications pertaining to Telecommunication, relevant BSS, ISS &

DOT(TEC) specifications.
d. Quarterly Technical Bulletin and other technical papers on telecommunication

matters published by the Railway Board.
277 | P a g e
e. Technical books and journals of interest on telecommunications.
f. Copies of technical instructions and reports issued by RDSO on different items

of work relating to underground telecom cable installations, such as Technical
Instructions on `balancing of VF cable', `jointing of cables', ìnstallation of loading
278 | P a g e
coils', ìnstallation of VF repeater station equipment', `cable laying practice for
optical fibre cables', `testing of digital microwave equipments' etc.,
29.6 RESPONSIBILITY OF DSTE : The Senior Divisional Signal & Telecommunication

Engineer / Divisional Signal & Telecommunication Engineer should encourage his
supervisors and other staff to study these reports, proceedings, papers and journals, so as to
enhance their knowledge and to keep themselves informed about the up-to-date
developments, methods and techniques in telecommunications. He should arrange to circulate
particulars of all new publications that are received from time to time for the information of
supervisors once every three months.
ANNEXURE -A
Para 29.1
STATEMENT SHWONG THE VARIOUS BOOKS OF REFERENCE AND

THEIR DISTRIBUTION AMONG STAFF
Item Publications Scale for

No.
Office of Personal possession of
Sr.DSTE/DSTE
Sr.DSTE/DSTE
SSE/SE(Tele)
Maintainer
SE(Tele)
ASTE
ASTE
CSTE
CSTE
279 | P a g e
CCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12
0
1. Telecommunication Engineering 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Manual
2. General and Subsidiary Rules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3. Stores Manual 1 - - 1 - - - - - -
4. Pass Manual 1 1 - - 1 - - - - -
5. Safety First Manual 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
6. Schedule of dimensions 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7. Telegraph Code 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
8. Payment of wages act with 1 1 - 1 - - - - - -
notifications as issued.
9. The hours of employment 1 1 - 1 - - - - - -
regulations with notifications as
issued.
10. Working Time table & Appendix 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
thereto
11. Catalogue of Stores 1 1 1 1 - - - - - -
12. Accident Manual 1 1 - 1 - - - -
13. IRS Drawings(Telecom) 1 1 1 1 - - - - - -
280 | P a g e
14. IRS specifications (of telecom items) 1 1 1 - - - - - - -
15. Railway Standard Drawings 1 1 1 1 - - - - - -
16. Indian Telegraph Act 1 1 - 1 - - - - - -
17. Indian Government Railway Code 1 - - - - - - - - -
for Engineering Department
18. CCIR Documents of the plenary 1 - - - - - - - - -
assembly
19. CCITT documents of the plenary 1 - - - - - - - - -
assembly
20. Indian Electricity Act 1 - - - - - - - - -
21. Electric Supply Rules 1 - - - - - - - - -
********
281 | P a g e
SYLLABUS for LDCE in S&T Dept.
PROFESSIONAL SUBJECT PART-I.
Maximum Marks 100 Time 3 Hours
NOTE: Total six questions to be answered Three in Part-À' and Three

in Part-`B' Four questions to be set in each part and three
out of four to be answered.
À'
General and Subsidiary Rules as applied to Railway operations,

signalling and works connected with signalling and P.Way; Special reference as
applied to automatic signalling and APB(Auto Perm. Block) working; Rules for opening
of a Railway with special reference to standards of interlocking at wayside stations,
provision of signals at level crossing gates and outlying sidings; rules for working of
outlying sidings with & without token control on single line; catch and slip sidings.
Signal Engineering Manual with special reference to various requirements of block
working, provision of signalling and interlocking; inspections to be carried out by
officers and subordinates etc. Telecommunication Engineering Manual with reference
to various types of line wire circuits and wireless circuits. Departmentally owned
Telecommunication alignments; various parameters valid for Copper, ACSR and G.I.
wires and their limitations; improvement to communication circuits by patching with
other carrier circuits, procedures for indenting of stores for revenue and works, imprest
stores, Stock sheets and other matters connected with goods store keeping practices;
Block Working Manual, with regard to requirements of token and token less
instruments on single line and double line instruments. Schedule of dimensions and
operating manual with special reference to infringements. Operations as affecting or
guided by better Signalling and Telecommunication arrangements.
`B'
Fundamental Engineering and applied technology; simple machinery like

inclined plane, pulley blocks, travelling trollies, machines which aid in reduction of time
and labour in installation of various signalling gears; Principle of magnetism and
electricity as affecting the operation of signalling equipments like Relays both AC
and DC, Point Machines, Signal Reversers, Signal Machines etc. Fundamental
electronics with special reference to power supply and stabilisation of power supply
equipments. Simple digital circuits as required for digital clocks, Axle Counters etc.
Heat engines and standby Diesel Generators with manual starting, electric starter and
automatic starter. A.C. to D.C. converters, D.C. to A.C. invertors and D.C. to D.C.
converters as power supply sources in Signalling and Telecommunication. Special
measures required for Telecommunication power supply to reduce noise. Power
supply distribution for signalling schemes with reference to voltage drop, size of cables
PROFESSIONAL SUBJECT PART-II.
282 | P a g e
Maximum Marks 100 Time 3 Hours
NOTE:Total 6 questions to be answered. Four questions to be provided

in each of the three parts À', `B' & `C'. Three questions to
be answered from any one part and three from any of the
other two parts.
À'
(i) Mechanical Signalling with special reference to provision of rod and wire
compensators, double wire operation of points; detectors and signals.
Temperature compensation in both Orthodox and double wire Signalling.
Various aspects of lever frames and methods of looking achieved.
(ii) Basic principles of electrical interlocking with reference to track locking,
back locking, approach locking, sectional route release and sequential
locking.
(iii) Track Circuits both DC and AC; Axle Counters as substitute for Track
Circuits.
(iv) Interlocking plans, locking tables and selection circuits.
(v) Types of Point Machines with their special features including
operating, control and detection circuits. Block Circuits for Token, Tokenless
and Double Line Instruments, Direction Lever Working with Track Circuits
and Axle Counters for single line sections, APB Signalling and intermediate
block signalling.
(vi) Automatic Signalling, Detailed Circuit operation for AC and DC Traction
areas including cascading circuits.
(vii) Simple Panel Interlocking, using metal to carbon Relays and metal to
metal Relays.
(viii) Route Relay Interlocking, Electronics Track Circuits, Automatic Warning
System, Centralised Traffic Control.]
(ix) Special features of Signalling in AC Traction Areas.
`B'
Overhead line wire, underground cable system. Special armatures of circuits in
25 KV traction areas. 2 wire to wire circuits. Conversion of 4 wire to 2 wire and 2 wire
to 4 wire circuits. Control office and wayside station equipment of different types,
emergency control communication equipments. Telephone Exchanges of PAX, PBX,
MAX-II and MAX-I types. Trunk Exchanges of various types. Telegraphy-Horse,
teleprinter circuits. Derivation of Telegraphic Channels through S+DX and VFT.
Multiplexing equipments, derivation of channels by frequency translation using sub-
groups, basic groups and super groups. HF-SSB Communication; multi-channel
communication using VHF, UHF, Microwave Systems using Audio Relay methods,
signal to noise ratio and fading.
`C'
(i) Workshop practice Raw materials, processing, workshop machines

and their utilisation. Quality control. Overhauling procedures and practices
Inspection, stage and final and testing.
(ii) Prime Movers.
283 | P a g e
(iii) Manufacture of Axle Counters details components testing
procedure commissioning and measurements.
(iv) Repairs and testing of HF Transmitter, microwave trans-receiver,
ultra sonic flaw detectors, automatic warning system.
(v) Overhauling of Relays requirement procedure methodology etc.
NOTES ON ACCOUNTS FOR LDCE(S&T)
Compiled by: RPS YADAV, SSE/Tele/RE/Allahabad

SYLLABUS
1. Parliamentary control over railway finance

2. Public accountability
3. Financial priority
4. Financial planning & Budgeting
5. Budgetary financial review
6. Appropriation accounts
7. Rules of allocation
8. Classification of expenditure control over expenditure.
9. Responsibility accounting
10.Performance Budgetary
11.Exchequer control
12.Financial resulting of working
13.Works program
14.Financial justification of works
15.Survey
16.Preparation of estimates
17.Capital budget
18.Control over capital expenditure
19.Productivity test
20.Financial control over stores expenditure
21.Purchase & stores keeping procedure
22.Inventory control & ABC analysis
23.Financial & cost control in railway workshops
24.Rules & procedure relating to tenders & contracts for execution of works &
procurement of stores
25.Procedure for processing & finalizing the audit objections & draft Para
26.Delegation of powers
27.Losses frauds & embezzlements
284 | P a g e
Notes of Establishment Rule for LDCE ( S&T )
Compiled by -- RPS Yadav,

SSE/Tele/RE/Allahabad
Syllabus
1. Organization of Personnel Dept in railways
2. Objective of Personnel dept
3. Functions & policies of personnel dept.
4. Role of personnel officers in HQ & Divn.
5. Classification of services Group A to D
6. Recruitment of artisan staff
7. Special reservations in railway services
8. Role of RRB in recruitment
9. Recruitment through other channels
10. Promotion policies & methods
11. Personnel supervision
12. Formal& informal democratic or participative leadership style
13. Advantage of participation
14. Joint council management
15. Negotiation schemes
16. Zonal & corporate enterprise groups
17. Inspectors of loco sheds, C&W Dipo, Stns & Engg offices
18. Imp recognized trade unions in railways
19. Role of unrecognized unions and methods of dealing with them
20. Industrial disputes and Legislative framework
21. Causes of industrial dispute and basic remedies
22. Industrial dispute act 1947
23. Strikes & lock outs
24. Ways of handling grievances by LEOs
25. HOER & overtime
26. Job analysis & its machines
27. Factory acts
28. Special rules for workshop staffs
29. Workmen compensation act
30. Ex-gratia payment
31. Incentive bonus scheme
32. Pass rules
33. Retirement benefits under provident fund scheme
34. Final settlement
35. Welfare for the family of retired and concept & practice of obtaining
285 | P a g e

Question Bank

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Question Bank

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SYSTEMS OF TRAIN WORKING

QUESTION BANK (SIGNAL)

2.41 STATION SECTION means that section of station limits

Between the Shunting Limit Boards or Advanced Starters (if any), or

(i) On a double line --

Between the Shunting Limit Boards or Advanced Starters (if any), or

Q2: What are the classifications of stations in Indian Railways?

Class of Station Minimum Equipment Additional Equipment

Letter 'A' extinguishes when the signal is working as a manual signal.

Semi - Automatic Stop White illuminated letter ‘A’ against

Q5: What is the normal aspect of a signal in Automatic signaling territory?

(a) The Absolute Block System

(b) The Automatic Block System

(c) The Following Trains System

(d) The Pilot Guard System

(e) The Train Staff and Ticket System

(f) The One Train Only System

“Where trains are worked on the Absolute Block System”.

STN. 'A' STN.'B'

Q10: What are the standards of interlocking prescribed in Railway Signalling?

Chapter VII, Para 7.131, Section M Important Minimum Signalling features

Sl. As per New Revised Para 7.131

3 2A Semaphore/ 2A/MA 2A/MA MA MA

4 Double Distant N Y** Y Y

5 Point Operation Mech Mech/Elec Mech/Elec Elec

6 Point Locking Key/FPL/ FPL/Pt M/c FPL/Pt M/c Clamp type

9 Interlocking Key/Mech Mech/Elec/Electronic Mech/Elec/Electronic Elec/Electronic

Q11: What are the different classes of LC gates? Please explain.

CHAPTER – 10: TIGHT AND LOOSE LOCKING

X Direction of Plunger movement when lever

Y Direction of Plunger movement when lever

1.7.1 CALCULATION OF BALLAST RESISTANCE IN A D.C. TRACK CIRCUIT

(i.e. Average Rail Voltage)

1.7.2 MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE BALLAST RESISTANCE FOR TRACK CIRCUITS

(a) 2  per Kilometer track length in station yard; and

In 1 Km length of track, about 1500 sleepers are provided. If on an average,

1.8 MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE RESISTANCE OF A CONCRETE SLEEPER

Type of Area Minimum Permissible Resistance Of A Concrete Sleeper

500 after six months from the date of

(c) Cross Bond.

2.5 CROSS BONDING OF UNINSULATED TRACK CIRCUIT RAILS

This arrangement is known as 'fed over' or 'cut section' track circuit

Q18: What do you mean by Fouling Protection of Track? Please explain.

These are defined as those portions of track circuits in which occupation by a

(a) The block joints position on track rails is staggered either

(i) due to unequal rail creep, particularly on curved tracks.

or (ii) due to rail ends on cross-overs being out of square:-

(b) A track portion is excluded from track circuit either

or (ii) due to a bridge or culvert being under the track.

or (iii) due to a tram line passing across the railway track.

S101 S103 S105

A1T 101T 101AT 103T 103AT 103BT 105T

Three modes of connections are adopted for FTGS-depend on the length of

(a) STANDARD LAYOUT

(b) CENTRE FED LAYOUT

(c) POINT LAYOUT

'S' BOND OF STEEL ALFA BONDS

RECEIVER (f1) RECEIVER (f3)

AXLE (f1) (f3)

transmission. In Electro-mechanical installations the functions are operated by mechanical

Fig. 1.1 LEVER LOCK

Fig. 1.2 ECONOMISER CONTACT

Fig. 1.3 LOCK PROVING CONTACTS

Fig.1.4A INDICATION CIRCUIT